Datamax All in One Printer E4203 User Manual

Programmer’s Manual  
Corporate Headquarters  
4501 Parkway Commerce Blvd.  
Orlando, Fl 32808  
Phone: 407-578-8007  
Fax: 407-578-8377  
Asia-Pacific  
19 Loyang Way  
Datamax International  
Herbert House  
#01-01 CILC Building  
Singapore 508724  
Phone: +65 542-2611  
Fax: +65 542-3611  
12 Elizabeth Way, Pinnacles  
Harlow, Essex CM19 5FE UK  
Phone: +44 1279 772200  
Fax: +44 1279 424448  
Table of Contents  
Preface.......................................................................................................1  
Who Should Use This Manual.......................................................................................1  
Scope of This Manual....................................................................................................1  
General Conventions.....................................................................................................2  
Computer Entry and Display Conventions.....................................................................2  
Getting to Know the Printer............................................................................................3  
Control Codes...........................................................................................5  
Introduction....................................................................................................................5  
Attention Getters............................................................................................................5  
Immediate Commands..............................................................................7  
Introduction....................................................................................................................7  
SOH #  
SOH A  
SOH B  
SOH C  
SOH D  
SOH E  
SOH F  
SOH U  
Reset..........................................................................................................7  
Send ASCII Status String...........................................................................7  
Toggle Pause .............................................................................................8  
Stop/Cancel................................................................................................8  
SOH Shutdown...........................................................................................8  
Send Batch Quantity ..................................................................................9  
Send Status Byte........................................................................................9  
Update System Database with Current Database......................................9  
System-Level Commands ......................................................................11  
Introduction..................................................................................................................11  
STX A  
Set Time and Date ...................................................................................11  
i
STX a  
STX B  
STX c  
STX d  
STX E  
STX e  
STX F  
STX f  
Enable Feedback Characters...................................................................12  
Get Printer Time and Date Information ....................................................12  
Set Continuous Paper Length ..................................................................13  
Set Double Buffer Mode...........................................................................13  
Set Quantity For Stored Label..................................................................13  
Select Edge Sensor..................................................................................14  
Form Feed................................................................................................14  
Set Form Stop Position (Backfeed Command) ........................................14  
Print Last Label Format............................................................................14  
Image Downloading..................................................................................15  
Scalable Font Downloading......................................................................16  
Set Pause for Each Label ........................................................................16  
Test RS-232 Port......................................................................................16  
Enter Label-Formatting Command Mode .................................................17  
Set Maximum Label Length ......................................................................17  
Set Metric Mode .......................................................................................17  
Set Imperial (Inches) Mode ......................................................................17  
Set Start of Print Position .........................................................................18  
Cycle Cutter..............................................................................................18  
Character (Hex) Dump Mode ...................................................................18  
Controlled Pause......................................................................................18  
Clear All Modules .....................................................................................19  
Clear Module............................................................................................19  
STX G  
STX I  
STX i  
STX J  
STX k  
STX L  
STX M  
STX m  
STX n  
STX O  
STX o  
STX P  
STX p  
STX Q  
STX q  
ii  
STX r  
STX S  
STX s  
STX T  
STX t  
Select Reflective Sensor ..........................................................................19  
Set Feed Speed .......................................................................................19  
Set Single Buffer Mode ............................................................................20  
Print Dot Pattern Label.............................................................................20  
Test RAM Memory Module.......................................................................20  
Label Format String Replacement Field...................................................21  
Software Switch Settings..........................................................................22  
Request Firmware Version.......................................................................22  
Request Memory Module Information ......................................................23  
Test Flash Memory Module......................................................................24  
Set Default Module...................................................................................24  
Delete File from Module ...........................................................................25  
Output Sensor Values ..............................................................................25  
Select Font Symbol Set............................................................................26  
Print Configuration and Dot Pattern Labels..............................................26  
Pack Module.............................................................................................26  
STX U  
STX V  
STX v  
STX W  
STX w  
STX X  
STX x  
STX Y  
STX y  
STX Z  
STX z  
Extended System Commands................................................................27  
Introduction..................................................................................................................27  
STX K  
Memory Configuration..............................................................................27  
Backfeed Time Delay ...............................................................................28  
Get Configuration .....................................................................................29  
Set Configuration......................................................................................29  
Database Configuration............................................................................33  
STX Kb  
STX KC  
STX Kc  
STX KD  
iii  
STX KE  
STX Kf  
Character Encoding..................................................................................34  
Set Present Distance................................................................................36  
Query Memory Configuration ...................................................................36  
Reset Memory Configuration....................................................................37  
Reset Resettable Counter........................................................................37  
Memory Configuration, Scalable Font Cache...........................................37  
Memory Configuration, Printable Label Width..........................................37  
STX KQ  
STX KR  
STX Kr  
STX KS  
STX KW  
Label-Formatting Commands ................................................................39  
Introduction .................................................................................................................39  
:
Set Cut By Amount...................................................................................39  
Set Format Attribute .................................................................................40  
Set Column Offset Amount ......................................................................41  
Set Cut By Amount...................................................................................41  
Set Dot Size Width and Height.................................................................42  
Terminate Label-Formatting Mode and Print............................................42  
Font Attributes..........................................................................................43  
Set Present Speed ...................................................................................44  
Place Data in Global Register ..................................................................44  
Select Heat Setting...................................................................................45  
Select Mirror Mode...................................................................................45  
Set Metric Mode .......................................................................................46  
Set Imperial (Inch) Mode..........................................................................46  
Set Print Speed ........................................................................................46  
A
C
c
D
E
F
f
G
H
M
m
n
P
iv  
p
Set Backfeed Speed ................................................................................47  
Set Print Quantity .....................................................................................47  
Set Row Offset Amount............................................................................48  
Recall Stored Label Format......................................................................48  
Set Slew Speed........................................................................................49  
Store Label Format In Module..................................................................49  
Set Field Data Line Terminator ................................................................50  
Mark Previous Field as a String Replacement Field.................................50  
Terminate Label-Formatting Mode without Printing..................................51  
Select Font Symbol Set............................................................................51  
Zero (Ø) Conversion to “0” .......................................................................52  
Make Last Field Entered Increment Numeric (Alphanumeric)..................52  
Make Last Field Entered Decrement Numeric (Alphanumeric) ................53  
Set Count by Amount ...............................................................................54  
Q
R
r
S
s
T
U
X
y
z
+ (>)  
- (<)  
^
Special Label-Formatting Commands .........................................................................54  
STX S  
STX T  
Recall Global Data And Place In Field...................................................55  
Print Time and Date...............................................................................55  
Font Loading Commands.......................................................................57  
Introduction..................................................................................................................57  
*c###D  
)s###W  
*c###E  
(s#W  
Assign Font ID Number............................................................................57  
Font Descriptor.........................................................................................57  
Character Code........................................................................................58  
Character Download Data ........................................................................58  
v
Generating Label Formats .....................................................................59  
Introduction..................................................................................................................59  
Format Record Commands .........................................................................................59  
Generating Records ....................................................................................................60  
The Structure of a Record ...........................................................................................60  
Record Structure Types...............................................................................................63  
Internal Bit-Mapped Fonts ...........................................................................................63  
Smooth Font, and Downloaded Bit-Mapped Fonts......................................................64  
Scalable Fonts.............................................................................................................64  
Bar Codes....................................................................................................................65  
Images.........................................................................................................................66  
Graphics ......................................................................................................................66  
Lines and Boxes.......................................................................................................66  
Polygons...................................................................................................................67  
Circles.......................................................................................................................68  
Available Fill Patterns for Polygons and Circles: ......................................................68  
Examples..................................................................................................................69  
Appendix A  
ASCII Control Chart.....................................................................................................71  
Appendix B  
Sample Programs........................................................................................................73  
Appendix C  
Available Font Sizes, Referencing and Samples.........................................................83  
vi  
Appendix D  
Error Codes .................................................................................................................89  
Appendix E  
Single-Byte Symbol Sets .............................................................................................91  
Appendix F  
Bar Code Summary Data ..........................................................................................101  
Bar Code Default Widths and Heights.......................................................................102  
Appendix G  
Bar Code Details .......................................................................................................103  
Appendix H  
Font Mapping: Single-Byte and Double-Byte Characters ..........................................131  
Appendix I  
Symbol Sets and Character Maps.............................................................................133  
Symbol Set Selection ................................................................................................133  
Double-Byte Symbols, Chinese, Kanji and Korean ...................................................135  
Appendix J  
Module Identifiers, Field Limits, Print Resolutions, & Column Values .......................137  
Appendix K  
Speed Ranges and Defaults......................................................................................139  
Appendix L  
Commands by Function.............................................................................................141  
vii  
Appendix M  
Image Loading...........................................................................................................143  
Appendix N  
UPC-A and EAN-13: Variable Price and Weight Bar Code .......................................145  
Appendix O  
International Language Print Capability (ILPC) Programming Examples ..................147  
Appendix P  
Downloading Firmware..............................................................................................153  
Appendix Q  
E-CLASS 4203 / 4304 Statement of Compatibility ....................................................155  
Appendix R  
Bar Code Symbology Information Sources................................................................157  
Glossary ................................................................................................159  
Index ......................................................................................................163  
viii  
Preface  
Who Should Use This Manual  
This manual is intended for programmers who wish to create their own label production software.  
Operators without programming experience may prefer to use a label-creation software package. For  
programming information on models not covered in this document, a copy may be downloaded from our  
web site at http://www.datamaxcorp.com.  
Scope of This Manual  
This manual explains the Datamax Programming Language (DPL) and its related uses in the writing,  
loading and storing of programs for the control and production of label formats using the Datamax  
E4203, E4204, and E4304 printers with Application (firmware) Versions 4.06 and above. This manual  
contains the following chapters and appendices.  
PREFACE on page 1  
Contents, organization and conventions used in this manual  
CONTROL CODES on page 5  
Description of the attention-getter characters necessary for the printer to receive a command  
sequence, and available alternate characters and line terminators.  
IMMEDIATE COMMANDS on page 7  
Description of the commands, listed alphabetically, that perform status queries and printer control  
commands.  
SYSTEM-LEVEL COMMANDS on page 11  
Description of the commands, listed alphabetically, that control the printer and allow scalable font  
and image downloads.  
EXTENDED SYSTEM COMMANDS on page 27  
Description of the commands, listed alphabetically, that control the printer.  
LABEL-FORMATTING COMMANDS on page 39  
Description of commands, listed alphabetically, that control the position of text and images on the  
media, print or store, and end the formatting process.  
FONT-LOADING COMMANDS on page 57  
Description of commands, listed alphabetically, used when downloading font data in PCL-4  
compatible bit-maps.  
E-Class DPL Programmer’s Manual  
1
Preface  
GENERATING LABEL FORMATS on page 59  
Description of the structure of records, the different types, and their use in generating label formats.  
APPENDICIES A THROUGH R on pages 71 through156  
These contain details that cannot be ignored including various tables, programming examples,  
printer default values, and bar code symbology details. See the Table of Contents for specific  
content information.  
GLOSSARY on page 157  
Definitions of words, abbreviations, and acronyms used in this manual.  
General Conventions  
These are some of the conventions followed in this manual:  
On the header of each page, the name of the chapter.  
On the footer of each page, the page number and the title of the manual.  
Names of other manuals referenced are in Italics.  
Notes are added to bring your attention to important considerations, tips or helpful suggestions.  
Boldface is also used to bring your attention to important information.  
This manual refers to IBM-PC based keyboard command characters for access to the ASCII  
character set. Systems based on different formats (e.g., Apple’s Macintosh ) should use the  
appropriate keyboard command to access the desired ASCII character. See Appendix A for the  
ASCII character set.  
Computer Entry and Display Conventions  
Command syntax and samples are formatted as follows:  
The Courier font in boldface indicates the DPL command syntax, and Italics are used to indicate the  
command syntax parameters.  
Regular Courier font indicates sample commands, files and printer responses.  
Square brackets [ ] around something indicates that it is optional.  
<CR> is used to identify the line termination character. Other strings placed between < > in this  
manual represent the character of the same ASCII name, and are single-byte hexadecimal values  
(e.g., <STX>, <CR>, and <0x0D> equal 02, 0D, and 0D, respectively).  
Hexidecimal values are often displayed in ‘C’ programming language conventions (e.g., 0x02 = 02  
hex, 0x41 = 41 hex, etc.)  
2
E-Class DPL Programmer’s Manual  
Preface  
Getting to Know the Printer  
The following highlights basic printer setup and control. For detailed information, including connections,  
features, media loading, and operating instructions refer to the appropriate Operator’s Manual.  
The Power Connection: Depending upon the model (see below), the printer can be connected via an  
external 110, 220, or auto-ranging AC power supply. Always ensure the power supply included  
with the printer is compatible with your electrical service.  
E4203, E4204 and E4304  
Interface Cable Requirements: The interface between the printer and host can be either a serial RS-  
232C cable (as shown below) or a Centronics parallel cable. When the printer is connected with  
both a serial and parallel cable, it will automatically interface to the first connection that transmits  
valid data. After this connection has been made, the printer’s power must cycled to change the  
interface connection.  
Serial Interface Cable Requirements  
Part # 32-2300-01  
Part # 32-2301-01  
E-Class DPL Programmer’s Manual  
3
Preface  
Interface Cable Connection: Connect the printer using the appropriate cable, as shown below.  
Front Panel Operation: The Front Panel consists of three lights and three dual-function buttons.  
E4203, E4204 and E4304  
Normal Operating Mode: While in the normal operating mode, the printer’s buttons control  
operations such as pause, feed, and cancel. The FEED button is used to clear a fault after its cause  
has been removed. For testing and reset functions, combinations of the buttons must be  
simultaneously pressed, as follows:  
‘F’ Buttons  
Function(s)  
Prints the Internal Test Label (see the Operator’s Manual for an  
example).  
+
Performs a warm reset, and then returns to the normal operating mode.  
Prints the Database Configuration and Dot Pattern Labels.  
+
+
Resets the printer to factory defaults: Turn the printer ‘off’, then press  
and hold the buttons while turning the printer ‘on’. Continue to depress  
the buttons until the Paused Indicator turns ‘off’.  
+
+
For setup and calibration functions see the Operator’s Manual.  
4
E-Class DPL Programmer’s Manual  
Control Codes  
Introduction  
The printer requires a special “attention getter” character in order to receive a command sequence,  
informing the printer that it is about to receive a command and the type of command it will be. Control  
Commands, System-Level Commands, and Font-Loading Commands have their own unique attention  
getter, followed by a command character that directs printer action.  
Attention Getters  
The attention getters (e.g., SOH”) are standard ASCII control labels that represent a one character  
control code (i.e., ^A or Ctrl A). Appendix A contains the entire ASCII Control Code Chart.  
Attention Getter For:  
Immediate Commands  
System-Level Commands  
Font-Loading Commands  
ASCII Character  
Decimal Value  
HEX Value  
SOH  
STX  
ESC  
1
2
27  
01  
02  
1B  
Table 2-1: Control Code Listings  
Alternate Control Code Modes  
For systems unable to transmit certain control codes, Alternate Control Code Modes are available.  
Configuring the printer to operate in an Alternate Control Code Mode (selected via the Setup Menu or  
the <STX>KD / <STX>Kc commands) requires the substitution of Standard Control Characters with  
Alternate Control Characters in what otherwise is a normal datastream.  
Control Character  
Standard  
0x01  
0x02  
Alternate  
0x5E  
0x7E  
Alternate-2  
0x5E  
SOH  
STX  
0x7E  
0x0D  
0x0D  
0x7C  
CR  
0x1B  
0x5E  
0x1B  
0x40  
0x1B  
0x40  
ESC  
“Count By”[1]  
1 See Label-Formatting Commands, ^, set count by amount.  
Table 2-2: Alternate Control Codes  
Note: Throughout this manual <SOH>, <STX>, <CR>, <ESC>, and ^ will be used to indicate the  
control codes. The actual values will depend on whether standard or alternate control codes  
are enabled for the particular application.  
Alternate Line Terminator  
Alternate-2 Control Codes provide for substitution of the line terminator as well as the control characters  
listed above. The line terminator <CR> (0x0D) is replaced by | (0x7C). The following is a sample label  
format datastream for a printer configured for Alternate-2 Control Codes:  
~L|1911A10001000101234560|X|~UT01ABCDE|~G|  
E-Class DPL Programmer’s Manual  
5
Control Codes  
6
E-Class DPL Programmer’s Manual  
Immediate Commands  
Introduction  
When the printer receives an Immediate Command, its current operation will be momentarily interrupted  
to respond to the command. Immediate Commands may be issued before or after System-Level  
commands; however, they may not be issued among Label-Formatting Commands or during font or  
image downloading. Immediate Commands consist of:  
1. Attention Getter, 0x01 or 0x5E, see Control Codes.  
2. Command Character  
SOH #  
Reset  
This command resets the printer. Resetting the printer returns all settings to default and clears both  
the communications and printing buffers. The command also clears DRAM memory.  
<SOH>#  
Syntax:  
Printer response:  
The printer will reset.  
T<XON> (The T may come after the <XON>).  
SOH A  
Send ASCII Status String  
This command allows the host computer to check the current printer status. The printer returns a  
string of eight characters, followed by a carriage return. Each character (see below) indicates an  
associated condition, either true (Y) or false (N). Byte 1 is transmitted first. See <SOH>F.  
<SOH>A  
Syntax:  
<SOH>A  
Sample:  
abcdefgh<CR>  
Printer response format:  
Where:  
Possible Values  
Interpretation  
Interpreter busy (Imaging)  
Byte Transmit Sequence  
a
b
c
d
e
f
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Y/N  
Y/N  
Y/N  
Y/N  
Y/N  
Y/N  
Y/N  
N
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Paper out or fault  
Ribbon out or fault  
Printing batch  
Busy printing  
Printer paused  
g
h
Label presented  
Always No  
E-Class DPL Programmer’s Manual  
7
Immediate Commands  
SOH B  
Toggle Pause  
This command toggles the printer’s paused state between on and off. (This is the same function  
achieved by pressing the PAUSE Button on the front panel.)  
<SOH>B  
Syntax:  
Sample:  
<SOH>B  
Printer response format: This command will illuminate the Paused Indicator, suspend printing and  
wait until one of the following occurs:  
The <SOH>B command is sent to the printer.  
The PAUSE Button is pressed.  
Upon which the printer will turn the Paused Indicator ‘off’ and resume  
operation from the point of interruption. (If the Receive Buffer is not full,  
an <XON> character will be transmitted from the printer.)  
SOH C  
Stop/Cancel  
This command performs the same function as pressing the CANCEL Button on the printer’s front  
panel. This function clears the current label format from the print buffer, pauses the printer and  
illuminates the Paused/Stop Indicator. (The pause condition is terminated as described under  
<SOH>B.)  
<SOH>C  
Syntax:  
SOH D  
SOH Shutdown  
This commands the printer to ignore Immediate Commands (^A). The SOH shutdown command is  
required before loading images or fonts because some may contain data sequences that could be  
interpreted as Immediate Commands. After the SOH shutdown command is sent, Immediate  
Commands can be turned back on by sending a valid SOH command three times, separated by a one  
second delay between each command, or by manually resetting the printer. It is good practice to  
check batch quantities (<SOH>E) to verify that the SOH commands are working.  
<SOH>D  
Syntax:  
8
E-Class DPL Programmer’s Manual  
Immediate Commands  
SOH E  
Send Batch Quantity  
This command causes the printer to send back a four-digit number indicating the quantity of labels  
that remain to be printed in the current batch, followed by a carriage return. Communications latency  
may cause this value to be higher than actual on some printers.  
<SOH>E  
nnnn<CR>  
nnnn  
Syntax:  
Printer response:  
Where:  
- Is four decimal digits, 0-9999.  
SOH F  
Send Status Byte  
This command instructs the printer to send a single status byte where each bit (1 or 0) represents one  
of the printer’s status flags, followed by a carriage return (see below). If an option is unavailable for  
the printer, the single bit will always be 0. See <SOH>A.  
<SOH>F  
Syntax:  
X<CR>  
Printer response format:  
Where ‘X’ is 0 through 0xef with bits as indicated in the ‘Condition’ column below:  
Bit[1]  
8
Value  
0
Condition  
Always zero  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
1 or 0  
1 or 0  
1 or 0  
1 or 0  
1 or 0  
1 or 0  
1 or 0  
Label presented  
Printer paused  
Busy printing  
Printing batch  
Ribbon out or Fault  
Paper out or Fault  
Command interpreter busy (Imaging)  
1 Bit one is the least significant bit.  
SOH U  
Update System Database with Current Database  
This command saves the current printer configuration to Flash memory. Only those parameters stored  
in Flash memory are affected. These are all the parameters that can be modified via the Setup Menu.  
The values of any <STX> System Commands issued prior to <SOH>U and affecting printer  
configuration items will also be saved. See the <SOH># command, above, for details on what events  
occur during a reset.  
<SOH>U  
Syntax:  
Printer response:  
The printer will reset.  
<XON>T (The T may come before the <XON>).  
E-Class DPL Programmer’s Manual  
9
Immediate Commands  
10  
E-Class DPL Programmer’s Manual  
System-Level Commands  
Introduction  
The most commonly used commands are the System-Level Commands. These are used to load and store  
graphic information, in addition to printer control. System-Level Commands are used to override default  
parameter values (fixed and selectable) and may be used before or after Immediate Commands but cannot  
be issued among Label-Formatting Commands. System-Level Commands consist of:  
1. Attention Getter, 0x02 or 0x7E, see Control Codes.  
2. Command Character  
3. Parameters (if any).  
STX A  
Set Time and Date  
This command sets the time and date. The initial setting of the date will be stored in the printer’s  
internal inch counter. This date can be verified by printing a Configuration Label.  
<STX>AwmmddyyyyhhMMjjj  
Syntax:  
Where:  
w
1 digit for day of week; 1 = Monday; 7 = Sunday  
mm  
2 digits for month  
dd  
2 digits for day  
yyyy  
hh  
4 digits for year  
2 digits for hour in 24 hour format  
MM  
2 digits for minutes  
jjj  
3 digits for Julian date (numerical day of the year) / constant; see notes below  
<STX>A1020319960855034  
Sample:  
Mon. Feb 3, 1996, 8:55AM, 034  
Printed response:  
Notes: (1) When set to 000, the Julian date is automatically calculated; otherwise, the Julian date  
will print as that entered number, without daily increments. If factory defaults are  
restored the actual Julian date will also be restored.  
(2) Printers without the Real Time Clock option lose the set time/date when power is  
removed.  
(3) Response format is variable; see the Special Label-Formatting Command <STX>T.  
E-Class DPL Programmer’s Manual  
11  
System-Level Commands  
STX a  
Enable Feedback Characters  
This command enables the feedback ASCII hex characters to be returned from the printer following  
specific events after each completed batch of labels when using serial communications. The default  
value is ‘Off’.  
<STX>a  
Syntax:  
Printer response:  
Event dependent. (Also, see Appendix D for error codes.)  
Where:  
Event  
Invalid character  
Label printed  
End of batch  
Return Characters  
0x07 ( BEL )  
0x1E ( RS )  
0x1F ( US )  
STX B  
Get Printer Time and Date Information  
This command instructs the printer to retrieve its internal time and date information.  
<STX>B  
Syntax:  
<STX>B  
Sample:  
wmmddyyyyhhMMjjj<CR>  
Printer response format:  
Where:  
w
mm  
1 digit for day of week; 1 = Monday  
2 digits for month  
dd  
2 digits for day  
yyyy  
hh  
MM  
4 digits for year  
2 digits for hour in 24 hour format  
2 digits for minutes  
jjj  
3 digits for Julian date / constant*  
* See <STX>A for details and restrictions.  
1020319960855034<CR>  
Printer response sample:  
12  
E-Class DPL Programmer’s Manual  
System-Level Commands  
STX c  
Set Continuous Paper Length  
This command sets the label size for applications using continuous media. It disables the top-of-form  
function performed by the Media Sensor. The sensor, however, continues to monitor paper-out  
conditions. See <STX>M.  
<STX>cnnnn  
nnnn  
Syntax:  
Where:  
-
Specifies the length of the media feed for each label format, in  
inches/100 or millimeters/10 (see <STX>m).  
<STX>c0100  
Sample:  
This sample sets a label length of 100, which equals 1.00 inch (assuming Imperial Mode is selected).  
Note: This command must be reset to zero for edge or reflective sensing operation. Pre-printed  
media cannot be used with a continuous paper length because print registration will be lost.  
STX d  
Set Double Buffer Mode  
This command, available for backward compatiblity, enables double buffer mode. When printing  
labels with incrementing, decrementing and replacement fields (see note below) the printer will only  
erase and format those fields, leaving the rest of the label format untouched, and thus increasing  
throughput. This command is only active if the labels being printed are less than half the maximum  
size of the print buffer (see <STX>S).  
<STX>d  
Syntax:  
Note: This command is generally not used because fast formatting is the normal operating mode  
when the number of variable print fields (Label-Formatting commands +, -, <, >, u) is less  
than or equal to 1/3 of the total print field count. In this case the command will force fast  
formatting even when the proportion of variable print fields is greater than 1/3 the total. The  
maximum label size is unaffected by this command. The <STX>s command restores  
normal (fast) formatting.  
STX E  
Set Quantity For Stored Label  
This command sets a number of labels for printing using the format currently in the print buffer. (The  
printer automatically stores the most recent format received in the buffer until the printer is reset or  
power is removed.) When used in conjunction with the <STX>G command, this will print the labels.  
<STX>Ennnn  
nnnn  
Syntax:  
Where:  
Sample:  
- A four-digit quantity, including leading zeros.  
<STX>E0025  
<STX>G  
Printer response:  
25 labels of the current format in memory will be printed.  
Note: This command may be issued prior to a label format without a specified quantity, Qnnnnn.  
E-Class DPL Programmer’s Manual  
13  
System-Level Commands  
STX e  
Select Edge Sensor  
This command enables transmissive (see-through) sensing for top-of-form detection of die-cut, and  
holed or notched media. This Media Sensor will detect a minimum gap of 0.1 inches (2.54 mm)  
between labels (see the Operator’s Manual for media requirements). Use the <STX>O command to  
adjust the print position. This is the printer default setting at power-up or reset.  
<STX>e  
Syntax:  
Note: This command is ignored when <STX>cnnnn is issued with a non-zero value for nnnn.  
STX F  
Form Feed  
This commands the printer to form feed to the next start of print.  
<STX>F  
Syntax:  
Printer response:  
The printer will form feed.  
Note: Following a reset, if the length of the first label fed is less than the label offset value  
(defined by the <STX>O command) the printer will advance past that label until a top-of-  
form is detected, or until the offset is reached,skipping labels as necessary, unless Label  
Alignment is enabled.  
STX f  
Set Form Stop Position (Backfeed Command)  
This sets the stop position of the printed label, allowing the label to stop at a point past the start-of-  
print position. When the next label format is sent, the printer motor reverses direction to retract the  
media to the start-of-print position. If quantities of more than one label are requested, the printer will  
operate without backfeeding. A backfeed will then only occur when printing has stopped for a few  
seconds.  
<STX>fnnn  
nnn  
Syntax:  
Where:  
- Is a three-digit distance from the Media Sensor, in inches/100 or  
mm/10. This distance is independent of the start-of-print position  
(<STX>O), yet it must be greater than the start-of-print position to  
take effect.  
<STX>f230  
Sample:  
The sample sets a stop position distance of 230 (2.3 inches from the Media Sensor’s eye).  
STX G  
Print Last Label Format  
This command prints a previously formatted label and restarts a canceled batch job following the last  
processed label. This is used when there is a label format in the buffer. The <STX>E command is  
used to enter the quantity. (If the <STX>E command is not used only one label will print.)  
<STX>G  
Syntax:  
14  
E-Class DPL Programmer’s Manual  
System-Level Commands  
STX I  
Image Downloading  
This command must precede image downloading from a host computer to the printer. The data that  
immediately follows the command string will be image data. If any of the 8-bit input formats are to  
be used, it is necessary to disable the Immediate Command interpreter by executing an <SOH>D  
command before issuing the <STX>I command. See Appendix M for more information. To print an  
image, see Generating Label Formats.  
Note: The native format for storing downloaded PCX and BMP images is RLE-2. This results in a  
better compression ratio for gray-scale images and for images with very large areas with  
either black or white, effectively resulting in more module space for downloaded images.  
<STX>Iabfnn…n<CR>data  
Syntax:  
Where:  
a
b
- Memory Module Bank Selection, A, B, or C; see Appendix J.  
- Data Type (optional), A or omit.  
b Value:  
Image Data Value Range:  
ASCII Characters 0-9, A-F, (7 bit)  
00-FF, (8 bit)  
A
omitted  
f
- Format Designator  
f Designator:  
Format Type:  
F
B
7-bit Datamax image load file  
.BMP 8-bit format (image flipped), black and  
white (B&W)  
b
I
i
P
p
R
.BMP 8-bit format (image as received), B&W  
.IMG 8-bit format (image flipped), B&W  
.IMG 8-bit format (image as received), B&W  
.PCX 8-bit format (image flipped), B&W  
.PCX 8-bit format (image as received), B&W  
RLE-2 Native format  
nn…n  
- Up to 16 characters used as an image name.  
<CR>  
-
0x0d terminates the name.  
data  
- Image data  
<SOH>D  
Sample:  
<STX>IApTest <CR>  
data...data <CR>  
The sample instructs the printer to (1) receive an 8-bit PCX image sent by the host in an 8-bit data  
format, (2) name the image ‘Test’, and (3) store it in memory module A.  
E-Class DPL Programmer’s Manual  
15  
System-Level Commands  
STX i  
Scalable Font Downloading  
The command structure for downloading both IntelliFont (.CDI) and TrueType (.TTF) scalable fonts  
(font files may be single-byte or double-byte character systems) is as follows:  
<STX>imtnnName<CR>xx…xdata…  
Syntax:  
Where:  
m
t
- Memory Module Designator to save this font to; see Appendix J.  
- Type of scalable font being downloaded:  
I = IntelliFont  
T = TrueType  
nn  
- Two-digit font reference ID. Valid range is 50-99, 9A-9Z, 9a-9z,  
(base 62 numbers).  
Name  
<CR>  
xx…x  
- The title, up to 16 characters, for this font.  
- 0x0d terminates the Name.  
- Eight-digit size of the font data, number of bytes, hexadecimal,  
padded with leading zeros.  
data  
- The scalable font data.  
<STX>iET52Tree Frog<CR>000087C2data...  
Sample:  
This sample downloads a TrueType font to module ‘A’, assigns it the font ID of 52 and the name  
“Tree Frog”. The size of the font data is 0x87C2 bytes.  
STX J  
Set Pause for Each Label  
This command causes the printer to pause after printing each label and is intended for use with the  
peel mechanism or tear bar when the Present Sensor option is not installed. After removing the label,  
the PAUSE Button must be pushed in order to print the next label. (The printer must be reset to clear  
the <STX >J command.)  
<STX>J  
Syntax:  
STX k  
Test RS-232 Port  
This command instructs the printer to transmit the character Y from the printer’s RS-232 port.  
(Failure to receive a ‘Y’ could indicate an interfacing problem.)  
<STX>k  
Syntax:  
Y
Printer response:  
16  
E-Class DPL Programmer’s Manual  
System-Level Commands  
STX L  
Enter Label-Formatting Command Mode  
This command switches the printer to the Label-Formatting Command mode. Once in this mode, the  
printer expects to receive Record Structures and Label-Formatting Commands. Immediate, System-  
Level, and Font-Loading commands will be ignored until the label-formatting mode is terminated  
with E, s, or X, (see Label-Formatting Commands for additional information).  
<STX>L  
Syntax:  
STX M  
Set Maximum Label Length  
This command instructs the printer move media this distance in search of the top-of-form (label edge,  
notch, black mark, etc.) before declaring a paper fault. A paper fault condition can occur if this  
setting is too close (within 0.1 inch [2.54 mm]) to the physical length of the label. Therefore, it is  
good practice to set this command to 2.5 to 3 times the actual label length used. The minimum value  
should be at least 5” (127 mm).  
<STX>Mnnnn  
nnnn  
Syntax:  
Where:  
- Is a four-digit length, 0000-9999, in/100 or mm/10. Maximum  
setting is 9999 (99.99 inches or 2540 mm). The default setting is  
16 inches/ 406.4 mm  
<STX>M0500  
Sample:  
The sample sets a maximum travel distance of 5 inches (unless printer is in metric mode, see  
<STX>m).  
STX m  
Set Metric Mode  
This command sets the printer to interpret measurements as metric values (e.g., <STX>c0100 will  
equal 10.0 mm). The default is Imperial (inches) Mode (see <STX>n).  
<STX>m  
Syntax:  
STX n  
Set Imperial (Inches) Mode  
This command sets the printer to interpret measurements as imperial values (e.g., <STX>c0100 will  
equal 1.00 inch). The printer defaults to this mode.  
<STX>n  
Syntax:  
E-Class DPL Programmer’s Manual  
17  
System-Level Commands  
STX O  
Set Start of Print Position  
This sets the point to begin printing relative to the top-of-form (the label’s edge as detected by the  
Media Sensor). The printer will feed from the top of form to the value specified in this command to  
begin printing. This value operates independently of the <STX>f command.  
<STX>Onnnn  
nnnn  
Syntax:  
Where:  
- Is a four-digit offset value. The “zero” setting is the default value,  
and settings below 50 are adjusted back to the default value. The  
default setting is 0220 in Imperial Mode (0559 in metric).  
<STX>O0300  
Sample:  
The sample sets a start of print position of 3.0 inches (unless in Metric Mode, see <STX>m).  
STX o  
Cycle Cutter  
This command will cause the (optional) cutter mechanism to immediately perform a cut after all  
previously received commands are executed. The cutter must be installed, enabled and the interlock  
closed for operation.  
<STX>o  
Syntax:  
STX P  
Character (Hex) Dump Mode  
This command instructs the printer to enter the Character Hex Dump Mode (also known as ASCII  
dump or monitor mode). Data sent to the printer following this command will be printed in raw  
ASCII format. Labels must be at least four inches (102 mm) long and as wide as the maximum print  
width. This command has the same effect as turning the printer ‘On’ while pressing the FEED  
Button; however, no Configuration/Test Pattern label is printed. To return to normal operation the  
printer must be manually reset.  
<STX>P  
Syntax:  
STX p  
Controlled Pause  
This command will cause the printer to pause only after all previously received commands are  
executed. This controlled pause is often useful between batches of labels. (This command will not  
clear the pause condition, see <SOH>B).  
<STX>p  
Syntax:  
18  
E-Class DPL Programmer’s Manual  
System-Level Commands  
STX Q  
Clear All Modules  
This command instructs the printer to clear all Flash and DRAM modules (see the Operator’s  
Manual of the corresponding printer for applicable memory options). All stored data will be  
destroyed.  
<STX>Q  
Syntax:  
STX q  
Clear Module  
This command clears the selected Flash or DRAM module. If a module is corrupted during normal  
operations (identifiable when the printer responds with a ‘No Modules Available’ message to a  
<STX>W command), it must be cleared. All stored data in the selected module will be destroyed.  
<STX>qa  
Syntax:  
Where:  
Sample:  
a
- Memory module designator, A – C; see Appendix J.  
<STX>qA  
The above sample clears memory module A.  
Notes: (1) If a module directory intermittently returns the message ‘No Modules Available’ or if  
data continuously becomes corrupted, the module may be at the end of its service.  
However, before concluding that a module is defective cycle the printer’s power and test  
the module.  
(2) Some Flash Memory Expansion options must have jumpers installed to perform this  
command.  
STX r  
Select Reflective Sensor  
This command enables reflective (black mark) sensing for top-of-form detection of rolled butt-cut,  
and fan-fold or tag stocks with reflective marks on the underside. This Media Sensor will detect a  
minimum mark of 0.1 inches (2.54 mm) between labels (see the Operators Manual for media  
requirements). The end of the black mark determines the top of form. Use the <STX>O command to  
adjust the print position.  
<STX>r  
Syntax:  
Default:  
Edge sensing  
STX S  
Set Feed Speed  
This command controls the rate at which media is output when the FEED Button is pressed.  
<STX>Sn  
Syntax:  
Where:  
n
- Is a letter value (see Appendix K).  
E-Class DPL Programmer’s Manual  
19  
System-Level Commands  
STX s  
Set Single Buffer Mode  
This command, available for backward compatiblity, instructs the printer to use single buffer  
operation. In single buffer mode, the printer will erase and format all fields. This, in turn, decreases  
printer throughput when incremental, decremental, or replacement fields are used (see Label-  
Formatting Commands). See <STX>d.  
<STX>s  
Syntax:  
STX T  
Print Dot Pattern Label  
This command instructs the printer to produce a Dot Pattern Label, a label comprised of differnet  
patterns that exercise the printhead. This is the same test label printed when powering on the printer  
while pressing the FEED Button, except that the printer will not produce a Configuration Label or  
enter the Hex Dump Mode. To view the full dot pattern use media at least 2 inches (51 mm) long and  
as wide as the maximum print width.  
<STX>T  
Syntax:  
Printer response:  
STX t  
Test DRAM Memory Module  
This command tests the DRAM module; however, the printer must be in Test Mode for the command  
to function. The printer returns a one-line message stating the module condition (no message is  
returned if a module is unavailable). To enable the Test Mode see the <STX>KD command.  
<STX>t  
Printer response format: axxxK results<CR>  
Syntax:  
a
Where:  
- 2 = Slot B  
xxx  
- Module size in Kbytes  
results - Test results given as ‘Good’ or ‘Bad’.  
20  
E-Class DPL Programmer’s Manual  
System-Level Commands  
STX U  
Label Format String Replacement Field  
This command places new label data into format fields to build a label. The new data string must  
equal the original string length and contain valid data. To easily keep track of fields, place all of the  
fields to be updated with the command at the beginning of the label format. A maximum of 99 format  
fields can be updated. Fields are numbered consecutively 01 to 99 in the order received.  
A variant of the <STX>U command includes the truncate option ‘T’, where dynamic data that is  
shorter that the originally defined field length will not be padded, and the original maximum field  
length is maintained for subsequent replacements. If this option is not used when dynamic data is  
shorter than the length of the originally defined data field, the field will be padded with blanks (or  
zero when the Format Record header specifies a numeric barcode).  
<STX>U[T]nnss…s<CR>  
Syntax:  
Where:  
nn  
- Is the format field number, 2 digits.  
- Truncate option  
[T]  
ss…s  
<STX>L  
- Is the new string data, followed by a <CR>  
Sample:  
161100001000100data field 1<CR>  
161100001100110data field 2<CR>  
161100001200120data field 3<CR>  
Q0001  
E
<STX>U01New data F1<CR>  
<STX>U02New data F2<CR>  
<STX>E0002  
<STX>G  
The sample produces three labels. The first is formatted with the commands between <STX>L and E.  
The next two labels print with the replacement data contained in the <STX>U commands (see  
<STX>E and <STX>G).  
E-Class DPL Programmer’s Manual  
21  
System-Level Commands  
STX V  
Software Switch Settings  
This command allows the control of printer options, where the appropriate value allows the option(s)  
to be turned ‘On’ or ‘Off’. Each option has a corresponding bit whose value is 1 when enabled. The  
tables below indicate the bit assignments and corresponding command value needed to enable the  
desired option(s).  
<STX>Vn  
Syntax:  
Where:  
n
- Is a single digit ASCII numeric value from 0-F. The value of n is  
used to override the power-up option settings. Reset or power-up  
returns the printer to the original settings.  
<STX>V5  
Sample:  
The sample corresponds to setting Bits 0 and 2, creating a command value of 5. When applied, this  
enables the Present Sensor and Cutter options.  
Bit Assignment  
Printer Option  
Cutter  
N/A  
Present Sensor  
N/A  
0
1
2
3
Use the bit assignment table above to determine the command value n in the binary table below (e.g.,  
the command value 5 sets the bits 0 and 2 to “1”).  
Command Values for Bits Assigned  
Bit  
n Value  
3
0
0
0
0
2
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
4
5
STX v  
Request Firmware Version  
This command causes the printer to send its version string (this data is the same as that printed on the  
Configuration Label).  
<STX>v  
Syntax:  
VER: E4304 – 04.06 09/01/2001  
<CR>  
Printer response:  
22  
E-Class DPL Programmer’s Manual  
System-Level Commands  
STX W  
Request Memory Module Information  
This command requests a directory listing for memory module(s). Although a module can store font,  
image and format data together, it can display only one type of information at a time. If the module  
contains all three types of data, it will be necessary to check the directory three times, using each of  
the control parameters, F, G, and L to determine the contents. When no user accessible modules are  
present, there is no printer response to <STX>WF, WG or WL.  
<STX>Wa  
Syntax:  
Where:  
a
- Data type:  
F
= Downloaded Font  
G = Graphic (Image)  
L = Label  
f
= All fonts (respective of the resident fonts available and  
any fonts that have been downloaded).  
<STX>Wf  
Sample:  
Printer response:  
Meaning:  
MODULE: A<CR>  
Module ID ‘A’, fonts following reside in this module  
103 CG Triumv <CR>  
MODULE: F<CR>  
Downloaded font ID and name  
Module ID ‘F’ (no user access), fonts following reside in this  
module  
000 <CR>  
001 <CR>  
002 <CR>  
003 <CR>  
004 <CR>  
005 <CR>  
006 <CR>  
007 <CR>  
008 <CR>  
012 <CR>  
013 <CR>  
014 <CR>  
015 <CR>  
016 <CR>  
017 <CR>  
018 <CR>  
019 <CR>  
020 <CR>  
Font internal ID 000, resident bitmapped font DPL ID 0  
Font internal ID 001, resident bitmapped font DPL ID 1  
Font internal ID 002, resident bitmapped font DPL ID 2  
Font internal ID 003, resident bitmapped font DPL ID 3  
Font internal ID 004, resident bitmapped font DPL ID 4  
Font internal ID 005, resident bitmapped font DPL ID 5  
Font internal ID 006, resident bitmapped font DPL ID 6  
Font internal ID 007, resident bitmapped font DPL ID 7  
Font internal ID 008, resident bitmapped font DPL ID 8  
Font internal ID 012, resident bitmapped font DPL ID 9, A06  
Font internal ID 013, resident bitmapped font DPL ID 9, A08  
Font internal ID 014, resident bitmapped font DPL ID 9, A16  
Font internal ID 015, resident bitmapped font DPL ID 9, A12  
Font internal ID 016, resident bitmapped font DPL ID 9, A14  
Font internal ID 017, resident bitmapped font DPL ID 9, A18  
Font internal ID 018, resident bitmapped font DPL ID 9, A24  
Font internal ID 019, resident bitmapped font DPL ID 9, A30  
Font internal ID 020, resident bitmapped font DPL ID 9, A36  
E-Class DPL Programmer’s Manual  
23  
System-Level Commands  
STX w  
Test Flash Memory Module  
This command tests the Flash memory module. The time for each test will vary from 20 to 120  
seconds, depending upon the size of the module. (When testing the optional module, jumpers must be  
installed.) All stored data will be destroyed. If no module is present, there will be no printer  
response.  
<STX>wa  
Syntax:  
Where:  
a
- Module designator; see Appendix J.  
Printer response format: Module A: xxxxK results  
A
Where:  
- Module tested.  
xxxx  
- Module size in kilobytes.  
results - Test results given as ‘Good’ or ‘Bad’.  
STX X  
Set Default Module  
This command, typically used prior to the loading of PCL-4 bit-mapped fonts (see Font-Loading  
Commands), is designed to allow the user to select between modules when downloading information.  
The default module is one of the following:  
1. The first alpha designator of the existing modules if item 2 has not occurred.  
2. The module selected by this command.  
<STX>Xa  
Syntax:  
Where:  
Sample:  
a
- Module designator, A or B; see Appendix J.  
<STX>XB  
The sample sets ‘B’ as the default module.  
24  
E-Class DPL Programmer’s Manual  
System-Level Commands  
STX x  
Delete File from Module  
This command removes a specific file from the specified module. The file name is removed from the  
module directory and thus the file cannot be accessed. The actual storage space occupied by the file  
is not released. (To reclaim deleted file storage space use <STX>z.)  
<STX>xmtnn…n<CR>  
Syntax:  
Where:  
m
t
- Module designator; see Appendix J.  
- The file type identification code:  
G
L
F
S
= Image file  
= Label format file  
= Bit-Mapped font file  
= Smooth scalable font file  
nn…n  
- The file name to delete, up to sixteen alphanumeric characters for  
graphic or label format files, 3 for bit-mapped font files, and 2 for  
smooth scalable font files.  
STX Y  
Output Sensor Values  
This command causes the printer to respond with its sensor value status. The printer must be in Test  
Mode (see the <STX>KD command). When <STX>Y is received, the printer will respond with A-D  
sensor values, see below. To repeat the display of values, send the printer a ‘space character’ (20  
hexadecimal). Send <ESC> to terminate the function.  
<STX>Y  
Syntax:  
Printer response:  
Thermistor ADC: 0048  
Paperout ADC: 0000  
TOF Adjust ADC: 0170  
Reflective ADC: 0000  
24 Volt ADC: 0217  
Ribbon ADC: 0125  
Transmissive ADC: 0204  
Contrast ADC: 0093  
Battery level: Good  
<CR>  
Where:  
Paperout ADC: 0225 indicates paper is present;  
0000 indicates paper is not present.  
Battery level: ‘Good’ indicates the battery has sufficient charge;  
‘Low’ indicates the battery is insufficiently charged  
Note: Some readings (e.g., the Media Sensor) require printer controlled paper movement to  
indicate a meaningful value.  
E-Class DPL Programmer’s Manual  
25  
System-Level Commands  
STX y  
Select Font Symbol Set  
This command selects the scalable font symbol set. The selected symbol set remains active until  
another symbol set is selected. See Appendices E, I, and the <STX>KS command for more  
information. Option dependant. Not all symbol sets can be used with all fonts.  
Syntax:  
Where:  
<STX>ySxx  
S
- Byte size designation, see Appendix H.  
S = Single-byte symbol sets  
U = Double-byte symbol sets  
xx  
- Symbol set selection.  
Sample:  
<STX>ySPM  
The sample selects the PC-850 multilingual set.  
STX Z  
Print Configuration and Dot Pattern Labels  
This command prints Configuration and Dot Pattern Labels. The results are similar to performing the  
power-up self-test, but the printer does not enter Hex Dump Mode. To capture all printed  
information, use the labels as wide as the maximum print width and at least 4 inches (102mm) long.  
<STX>Z  
Syntax:  
Printer response:  
FRI SEPTEMBER 026, 1997 19:29 244  
DIRECT THERMAL  
COMMUNICATIONS NOT DETECTED  
9600,8,N  
VER: E4304  
-
04.06 08/24/01  
BOOT 83-2329-04A  
CODE 83-2325-04F  
EDGE  
FONT 83-2337-01A  
SOP ADJUST________ 128  
PRESENT ADJUST____ 128  
CPLD 59-2157-01C  
SYSTEM RAM CHECKS____ GOOD  
SYSTEM RAM SIZE___ 2016 KBYTES  
SYSTEM RAM AVAIL__ 1264 KBYTES  
REG POWER SUPPLY__ NO  
TOF LOW___________  
TOF DELTA_________ 10  
TOF GAIN__________ 10  
0
OOS MAXVOLT_______  
2
INPUT VALUES  
COUNTER INFORMATION  
PAPER_____________ 255  
DARKNESS__________ 131  
TRAN______________ 255  
REFL______________ 149  
RIBM______________ 87  
THR_______________ 48  
24V_______________ 223  
ABSOLUTE VALUES 9-18-1999  
LENGTH____  
TIME______  
773 INCHES  
20 HOURS  
RESETTABLE VALUES 9-22-1999  
LENGTH____  
TIME______  
576 INCHES  
10 HOURS  
MEMORY CONFIGURATION  
INTERNAL MODULE______ 128  
SCALABLE FONTS_______  
64  
LABEL SIZE 0410:02218 IN  
STX z  
Pack Module  
This command causes the printer to reclaim all storage space associated with all deleted files on the  
specified module (see <STX>X and <STX>x).  
<STX>zm  
Syntax:  
Where:  
m
- Module designator; see Appendix J.  
26  
E-Class DPL Programmer’s Manual  
Extended System Commands  
Introduction  
Extended System Commands expand certain System-Level Commands, providing extra printer control.  
Extended System Commands are issued in the same context as System-Level Commands. The table below  
lists the commands.  
Command  
<STX>K Command Character  
b
C
c
D
E
f
M
Q
R
r
S
W
Backfeed Time Delay  
Get Configuration  
Set Configuration  
Database Configuration  
Character Encoding  
Set Present Distance  
Memory Configuration, Internal Module  
Query Memory Configuration  
Reset Memory Configuration  
Reset Resettable Counters  
Memory Configuration, Scalable Font Cache  
Memory Configuration, Printable Label Width  
Table 5-1: Extended System Command Characters  
STX K  
Memory Configuration  
This command configures the available DRAM as a method for managing printer memory. The  
DRAM memory includes standard DRAM. Memory can be assigned to specific entities or functions  
in units of 4KB blocks. The allocation(s) as set by this command, draw from the same memory pool,  
control the sizes of internal Module A, Scalable Cache, and label width. The command indirectly  
affects maximum print length and label throughput; see note below. The printer executes the memory  
configuration specified by the command during the next idle period following its receipt, and is  
stored in Flash memory then reinstated upon a power-up or reset. If the total requested memory  
allocation exceeds the configurable memory available, contains no fields, or for configurations not  
specified, the command will be rejected and the printer will assume its previous configuration. Any  
of the three fields are optional, and are separated by the colon. Brackets indicate optional fields.  
<STX>Kix[:jy][:kz]<CR>  
Syntax:  
Sample:  
<STX>KM0020:S0015<CR>  
In the sample, memory is allocated 20*4*1024 bytes for Module A space and 15*4*1024 bytes for  
the scalable cache.  
E-Class DPL Programmer’s Manual  
27  
Extended System Commands  
Where: i, j, k are M, S, or W; x, y, z are four-digit maximum numbers of 4K byte blocks or  
inches/100 or (mm/10) as described below.  
M
Represents the start of a sequence (up to five characters) that assigns memory to the  
Internal Module A. If this field does not appear, then the Internal Module is not  
affected. If no Internal Module exists, it will be created and formatted. Existing  
Internal Modules will be erased, re-sized and formatted. The number that follows the  
M is a decimal number (up to four digits) that specifies the size in 4KB blocks of  
memory to assign to the Internal Module. A value of “0000” will delete the Internal  
Module (see Appendix J for additional information).  
S
Represents the start of a sequence (up to five characters) that assigns the amount of  
internal memory allocated to the smooth scalable font processor. This field is optional;  
if it does not appear, the current amount of memory assigned to the smooth scalable  
font processor will remain unchanged. The allocation must be at least 15 (60KB) to  
print scalable fonts, and at least 30 for double-byte fonts. The number that follows the  
S is a decimal number (up to four digits) that specifies the size in 4 KB blocks to  
assign to the smooth scalable font processor. Any value less than the minimum  
requirement results in the amount assigned to be zero (0), thereby disabling the  
printing of smooth scalable fonts. The recommended value is 0025 (100KB).  
W
Represents the start of a sequence (up to five characters) that sets the printable label  
width. Setting a width smaller than the natural (maximum) width of the printer  
effectively extends printable label length. This field is optional; if it does not appear,  
the current printable label width is left unchanged. The number that follows the W is a  
decimal number (up to four digits) that specifies the printable label width in either  
100ths of an inch or millimeters, depending on the current units setting of the printer  
(imperial or metric). If the value specified exceeds the printable width of the printer,  
the printable label width is set to the maximum. If the value specified is less than the  
minimum value allowed (200) then the printable label width is set to the minimum  
allowed value.  
Note: Label printing requirements may be computed as bytes (label print length * width allocation  
* printhead resolution / 8). For maximum throughput, the memory allocated should allow  
for a minimum of three times the computed requirement, or the available label length (as  
determined by <STX>KQ command) should be three times the label print length.  
STX Kb  
Backfeed Time Delay  
The backfeed time delay command controls the time a printed label is allowed to remain “presented”  
before being retracted to the start of print position.  
<STX>Kbnnn<CR>  
nnn  
Syntax:  
Where:  
- Seconds/10  
28  
E-Class DPL Programmer’s Manual  
Extended System Commands  
STX KC  
Get Configuration  
This command returns the configuration of the printer. The form of the returned data is similar to that  
of a Configuration Label. This command should be parsed by KEYWORDS, not Character  
POSITIONS. Each line is terminated by a CR (0x0d) & LF (0x0a). Datamax will make every effort  
to keep Keyword consistent.  
<STX>KC<CR>  
Syntax:  
Printer response:  
XXX NOT SET  
00, 0000 00:22 000  
VER: E4304 - 04.06 08/24/01  
BOOT 83-2329-04A  
ALIGN LENGTH______ 460  
STOP LOCATION_____ PEEL  
INPUT VALUES  
CODE 83-2325-04F  
FONT 83-2337-01A  
PAPER_____________  
0
CPLD 59-2157-01C  
POT_______________ 255  
TRAN______________ 250  
INTERNAL FLASH MODULE PRESENT  
SYSTEM RAM CHECKS____ GOOD  
SYSTEM RAM SIZE___ 2015 KBYTES  
SYSTEM RAM AVAIL__ 1244 KBYTES  
REG POWER SUPPLY__ YES  
CONFIGURATION  
REFL______________  
0
RIBN______________ 116  
TEMP______________ 52  
VOLT______________ 214  
COUNTER INFORMATION  
DIRECT THERMAL  
ABSOLUTE VALUES  
LENGTH____  
1- 1-1995  
2065 INCHES  
62 HOURS  
SERIAL PORT SELECTED  
9600;8 BITS  
TIME______  
EDGE  
RESETABLE VALUES 1- 1-1995  
CONT FORM LENGTH__  
0
LENGTH____  
TIME______  
2065 INCHES  
62 HOURS  
PRESENT ADJUST____ 127  
SOP ADJUST________ 127  
MEMORY CONFIGURATION  
INTERNAL MODULE______  
SCALABLE FONTS_______  
TOF LOW___________  
TOF DELTA_________  
TOF GAIN__________  
OOS MAXVOLT_______  
0
0
15  
32  
10 10  
12 10  
LABEL SIZE  
END OF LIST  
0416:02157 IN  
3
3
LABEL ALIGNMENT___ AUTO  
STX Kc  
Set Configuration  
This command, equivalent to using other system commands followed by the <SOH>U and intended  
for easily configuring a custom setup not dynamic configuration changes, specifies the Power-up  
Configuration parameter values for the printer. The printer will reset upon completion of a command  
stream containing parameter value (e.g., memory configuration, label width, etc.) changes; no  
commands should be sent until this reset is complete. The following are highlights of this command:  
These parameter values do not affect the factory default settings of the printer.  
When separated by a semi-colon (;), multiple parameter values included in a single command  
stream.  
All values are stored in Flash memory and remain in effect until new values are received or until  
factory defaults are restored.  
If system commands are sent that override the Power-up Configuration value(s), the Power-up  
Configuration value(s) will be restored the next time the printer is powered ‘on’ or reset.  
The parameters are the same as those found in the Setup Menu.  
Note: Illegal or out of range parameter values may have unpredictable results.  
E-Class DPL Programmer’s Manual  
29  
Extended System Commands  
<STX>Kcaa1val1[;aaIvalI][;aanvaln]<CR>  
Syntax:  
Where:  
aa1, aaI, aan  
- Are two letter parameter names  
val1, valI, valn  
- Are parameter values, with ranges appropriate for  
the associated parameter  
<STX>KcPA120;CL600;STC<CR>  
Sample:  
The sample sets the Present Adjust to 120 dots, the Continuous Label Length to 6 inches, and the  
Media Sensor Type to Continuous.  
The following table summarizes the different Set Configuration Command parameters. Descriptions  
of these parameters can be found by referencing the Command Equivalent. Where no equivalent is  
given, Unique parameters descriptions are given below.  
Setup  
Parameter  
Name  
Parameter  
Pneumonic  
Value  
Range  
Units /  
Interpretation  
Command  
Equivalent  
Menu  
Item  
10  
N/A  
9
Continuous Label Length  
Configuration Query  
Control Codes  
CL  
QQQ  
CC  
0 – 9999  
none  
S, 1, 2  
Y, N  
1/100 in.  
none  
Standard, Alternate, Alternate-2  
Enabled, Disabled  
<STX>c  
N/A  
<STX>KD  
<STX>KD,  
<STX>V  
<STX>KM  
N/A  
N/A  
<STX>KM  
N/A  
Cutter Equip  
CE  
4
Internal Module A  
Label Alignment  
Label Alignment Length  
Label Width  
No Paper Min (OOS)  
No Paper Min Reflective  
Print Method  
IM  
LA  
AL  
LW  
TN  
RN  
MT  
PA  
PS  
0 – 128  
Y, N, A  
000 – 999  
75 - head width  
0 – 16  
4 KB  
Enabled, Disabled, Automatic  
1/100 inch  
17  
18  
19  
15  
11  
11  
1
1/100 inch  
.1 Volt DC  
.1 Volt DC  
0 – 16  
D, T  
0 – 255  
Y, N  
N/A  
<STX>KD  
N/A  
Direct, Thermal Transfer  
Dots  
Present Adjust  
Present Sensor Enable  
6
3
Enabled, Disabled  
<STX>KD,  
<STX>V  
<STX>KS  
<STX>e,  
<STX>r,  
<STX>KD  
<STX>KD  
N/A  
Scalable Cache  
Sensor Type  
SC  
ST  
0 – 128  
G, C, R  
4 KB (0 = disabled)  
Gap (Edge), Continuous,  
Reflective  
16  
2
Serial Port Configuration  
SOP Adjust  
Stop Location  
TOF Bias  
TOF Bias Reflective  
TOF Delta  
TOF Delta Reflective  
TOF Gain  
TOF Gain Reflective  
SP  
SA  
SL  
TB  
RB  
TD  
RD  
TG  
RG  
A
See details below  
Dots  
7, 8  
5
0 – 255  
H, P, C, T, N Host, Peel, Cut, Cover, None  
20  
14  
14  
13  
13  
12  
12  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
0 – 50  
0 – 50  
0 – 50  
0 – 50  
0 – 15  
0 – 15  
.1 Volt DC  
.1 Volt DC  
.1 Volt DC  
.1 Volt DC  
.1 Volt DC  
.1 Volt DC  
Table 5-2: Set Configuration Commands  
Configuration Query – This command causes the printer to respond with the current  
configuration settings. The <STX>Kc response command stream format is sent to the host  
30  
E-Class DPL Programmer’s Manual  
Extended System Commands  
computer via the serial port, contains all parameters controlled by the <STX>Kc command, and  
may be used for restoring the printer’s configuration or for configuring other printers. Media  
sensing scaling values, TOF Bias, etc. may not be effective on other printers of the same type  
due to hardware tolerances.  
Label Alignment – This function prevents labels with lengths that are less than the distance  
between the printhead and the Media Sensor from being wasted at power-up. See the  
appropriate Operator’s Manual for detailed information.  
Note: The Real Time Clock (RTC) option allows the position-state of the label to be stored,  
thus eliminating the need for an alignment prior to the printing of the first label  
(assuming the label position has not moved while power was off). If the label stock has  
been changed then a Forced Alignment (the FEED Button is pressed and held for four  
seconds) is recommended.  
Label  
Alignment  
Setting  
Media Type,  
Operation Mode  
Description  
Continuous stock; 6.5” or  
greater die-cut, notched and  
reflective stocks; multiple  
form lengths  
Disabled  
At power-up, printing will begin at the current label position  
without any alignment (unless the RTC option is installed).  
6.5” or less die-cut, notched Automatic Use for easy label length changes, and to automatically set the  
and reflective stocks  
maximum label length. Press and hold the FEED Button four  
seconds and the printer will automatically measure the label  
length. Once loaded and aligned subsequent power-ups will  
result in no wasted labels.  
Enabled  
Use for constant label lengths. Specify the Label Alignment  
Length using the <STX>KcAL command or the Setup Menu.  
Press and hold the FEED Button four seconds, or toggle  
printer power, then the printer will align with the specified  
length.  
6.5” or less die-cut, notched Automatic This mode of operation requires a Label Alignment Length or  
and reflective stocks with  
the Present Sensor enabled  
that Label Alignment be set to AUTO. If either of these  
conditions is not met, the printer will not perform the  
alignment.  
Label Alignment Length – This length, measured from leading edge to leading edge of two  
successive labels, must be provided to the nearest hundredth of an inch. The number of labels  
that can be fit between the Media Sensor and the printhead will magnify any error in label  
alignment length. Errors are more favorable on the low side than on the high side.  
Media Type Sets printing for either direct thermal media or thermal transfer media.  
No Paper Min / No Paper Min Reflective Sets the Media Sensor reading for the Out Of Stock  
condition.  
E-Class DPL Programmer’s Manual  
31  
Extended System Commands  
Present Adjust Fine-tunes the label stop position (see notes below).  
Serial Port Configuration This command is followed by the port ID, always ‘A’ (i.e., SPA)  
then by the configuration parameter and value of Baud or Data Bits:  
Baud Rate The SPABnn command sets the baud rate for the printer serial port, where nn  
may be any of the following:  
Bnn  
12  
24  
48  
96  
19  
38  
Baud Rate (Bits Per Second)  
1200  
2400  
4800  
9600  
19200  
38400  
Sample: <STX>KcSPAB38<CR>  
The above sample sets the printer serial port baud rate to 38400 BPS (the host computer  
communications setup is expected to be the same) and has the same effect as using the Setup  
Menu.  
Data Bits The <STX>KcSPADn command selects either 7 or 8 data bits, where n may be  
either of the following:  
Dn  
7
8
Data bits (word length)  
7
8
Sample: <STX>KcSPAD8<CR>  
The above sample sets the printer serial port to receive eight-bit words (the host computer  
communications setup is expected to be the same) and has the same effect as using the Setup  
Menu.  
SOP Adjust Fine-tunes the label Start Of Print position (see note below).  
Stop Location – Configures the printer for all standard label present positions, as follows:  
Setting  
Stop Location  
Host  
Provides backward compatibility for users engaging the cutter or Present Sensor to  
achieve present distances. The stop location (present distance) may be controlled  
dynamically by the host using the <STX>f or <STX>Kf commands. This selection  
has the same effect as <STX>KD Ignore Host Distance bit value 0.  
Peel  
Cut  
Sets the stop location to approximately 2 mm behind the peel bar edge, a nominal  
peel position. The Present Sensor status and this setting are independent.  
Sets the stop location to a nominal cut position. For die-cut media, the position is just  
following the end of the label. The cutter status and this setting are independent.  
Cover Sets the stop location to that of the tear bar on the printer cover.  
None Sets the stop location to the start of the next label, equivalent to setting the  
<STX>KD Ignore Host Distance bit value 1.  
Note: The Peel, Cut, Cover, and None settings prevent host commands from affecting start  
of print (<STX>O) and stop position (<STX>f, <STX>Kf) commands from being  
honored. All stop locations can be adjusted with PRESENT ADJUST.  
32  
E-Class DPL Programmer’s Manual  
Extended System Commands  
TOF Bias / TOF Bias Reflective – Manual entry for the control of the minimum voltage required  
to detect the label.  
TOF Delta / TOF Delta Reflective Manual entry for the control of the low level voltage  
difference level to recognize a label “gap” or “mark.”  
TOF Gain / TOF Gain Reflective Manual entry for the control of the voltage to the LED  
emitter of the Media Sensor.  
STX KD  
Database Configuration  
This command, stored in Flash memory and retained for future power-ups, controls the printer’s  
environment and operates as a pseudo DIP switch.  
<STX>KDwxyz<CR>  
Syntax:  
Where:  
w, x, y, and z are binary values with respective bit settings as defined  
in the following tables. (Bit 0 is least significant.)  
<STX>KD@H@@<CR>  
Sample:  
The sample configures the printer as follows:  
@
H
@
@
Sets the communications to 9600 baud with an 8-bit word and no parity;  
Selects direct thermal printing, standard control characters, and enables the media cutter;  
Selects gap sensing;  
Is the default setting (items saved for future expansion).  
Note: The Ignore Host Distance setting (see below) allows the printer to disregard <STX>O and  
<STX>f commands; a feature provided for host system software that sends these  
commands with values that may be inappropriate for the printer and result in incorrect start  
of print and present distances. Use the <STX>KD command or the Setup Menu to enable  
this feature.  
E-Class DPL Programmer’s Manual  
33  
Extended System Commands  
<STX>KD  
Parameter  
w
Bit  
Number  
0 – 2  
Parameter  
Function  
Parameter  
Value(s)  
BAUD Rate / Set Test Mode 0 = 9600, 1 = 600, 2 = 2400, 3 = 19200, 4 =  
4800, 5 = 38400, 6 = 1200, 7 = 9600 Test Mode  
3
Word Length and Parity  
Unused  
0 = 8 bits, no parity; 1 = 7 bits, even parity  
Set to 0  
4 & 5  
6
Always 1  
Set to 1  
7
Always 0  
Set to 0  
0
1
2
3
Print Method  
Present Sensor  
Control Character[1]  
Cutter  
0 = direct thermal, 1 = thermal transfer  
0 = not equipped, 1 = equipped  
0 = standard, 1 = alternate characters  
0 = disabled, 1 = enabled  
x
4
5
6
Ignore Host Distance  
Alt-2 Control Codes[1]  
Always 1  
0 = disabled, 1 = enabled (See note above)  
0 = disabled, 1 = alternate-2 characters  
Set to 1  
7
Always 0  
Set to 0  
0 & 1  
2
3 – 5  
6
7
0 & 1  
2
3 – 5  
6
Paper Type (Media Sensor)  
Linerless  
Unused  
Always 1  
Always 0  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Unused  
Always 1  
0 = gap (edge), 1 = reflective, 2 = continuous  
0 = not equipped, 1 = equipped  
y
z
Set to 0  
Set to 1  
Set to 0  
Set to 0  
Set to 0  
Set to 0  
Set to 1  
Set to 0  
7
Always 0  
1 Selects the values of the control characters; see Control Codes.  
Table 5-3: <STX>KD Configuration Commands  
STX KE  
Character Encoding  
This command is provided primarily as a means for users of 7-bit communication and to embed  
control characters and extended ASCII characters in their datastreams. Any character in the DPL  
datastream may be substituted with a delimited two-character ASCII hexadecimal numeric  
equivalent. The command allows the delimiting character to be selected, and the encoding to be  
enabled or disabled. When character encoding is enabled, the printer will decode any ASCII  
hexadecimal numeric pairs following the delimiter as single-byte values. Character encoding is used  
where control characters cannot be transmitted or where control characters within data may  
prematurely terminate a label format record. Although the delimiter may be changed at any time  
(except within a label format definition), there cannot be more than one defined delimiter, and  
character encoding must be disabled with <STX>KEN prior to re-enabling, regardless of any change  
in the delimiter.  
<STX>KEex  
Syntax:  
Where:  
e
-
-
Y – character encoding enabled  
N – character encoding disabled  
x
Delimiter: one ASCII character (Do not include when e = N)  
34  
E-Class DPL Programmer’s Manual  
Extended System Commands  
<STX>KEN  
<STX>KEY\  
Sample:  
<STX>L<CR>  
1u0000001200120[)>\1E\01\1D\...\04\<CR>  
E<CR>  
The sample disables, then enables character encoding with the backslash (\) as the delimiter. A UPS  
Maxicode will be formatted using a data string interpreted as: [)>R 01G ... EOT<CR>; then formatting  
S
S
is terminated.  
Character Encoding Syntax: This syntax requires at least two hexadecimal ASCII digits (0-9, A-F)  
delimited by the character specified in the <STX>KE command. The number of hexadecimal digits  
between the delimiter pair must be even; see notes below.  
xaa[bbcc…nn]x  
Syntax:  
Where:  
x
-
-
One byte delimiter, 0 to ff16, leading and trailing.  
aa  
2 bytes, ASCII, hexadecimal encoded, range each character -  
0-9, A-F  
bb  
cc  
nn  
-
-
-
2 bytes, ASCII, hexadecimal encoded, range each character -  
0-9, A-F (optional)  
2 bytes, ASCII, hexadecimal encoded, range each character -  
0-9, A-F (optional)  
2 bytes, ASCII, hexadecimal encoded, range each byte - 0-9,  
A-F (optional)  
Notes: (1) A delimiter pair with no ASCII hexadecimal pairs between (e.g., \\) will be interpreted  
as one byte whose value is that of the delimiting character, allowing the assigned delimiter  
to be interpreted as itself rather than as the delimiter.  
(2) A delimited string that contains either a non-valid hexadecimal character (e.g., FX) or  
an odd number of bytes will be treated as an illegal string and, therefore, not correctly  
decoded.  
Character Encoding Examples: In the following partial datastreams it is assumed that character  
encoding is enabled and that the selected delimiter, a backslash (\), has been transmitted to the printer  
(i.e., <STX>KEY\). In each example, the printer has not received an unpaired delimiter prior the  
example.  
Partial DPL  
Interpretation  
Sample Datastream  
AB\\CE  
\ABCDEF\  
1A\1A\1A  
5 bytes AB\CE with values 4116, 4216, 5C16, 4316, 4416  
3 bytes with values AB16, CD16, and EF16  
5 bytes 1A<SUB>1A with values 3116, 4116, 1A16, 3116, 4116.  
<SUB> represents a single-byte ASCII control character with value 1A16  
Alternate Control Codes with Alternate Line Terminator: Character Encoding can also be used  
with the Alternate Control Character set. Alternate Control Characters are enabled via a Setup Menu  
or the <STX>KD / <STX>Kc commands. See Control Codes.  
E-Class DPL Programmer’s Manual  
35  
Extended System Commands  
STX Kf  
Set Present Distance  
This command specifies an additional amount to advance the label after printing. This command has  
the same effect as the <STX>f command, but specifies a distance to advance relative to the start of  
print (<STX>O command) of the next label.  
<STX>Kfnnnn<CR>  
nnnn  
<STX>Kf0100  
Syntax:  
Where:  
Sample:  
- A four-digit present distance in inches/100 or mm/10.  
The sample represents a one-inch label advance unless in metric mode (see <STX>m).  
STX KQ  
Query Memory Configuration  
This command causes the printer to transmit DRAM memory configuration to the host device  
regarding the total amount installed, the amount available for configuration, and the amount  
currently assigned to specific functions or entities.  
<STX>KQ<CR>  
Syntax:  
INTERNAL MEMORY<CR>  
VER: aa-cdd.ee mm/dd/yy<CR>  
INSTALLED: iiii<CR>  
AVAILABLE: vvvv<CR>  
MODULE: X:xxxx<CR>  
Printer response format:  
SCALABLE: ssss<CR>  
LABEL MEM: LLLL<CR>  
LABEL SIZE: wwww:gggg:oo<CR>  
36  
E-Class DPL Programmer’s Manual  
Extended System Commands  
<CR>  
Where:  
- ASCII Carriage Return (0x0D) record delimiter.  
aa-  
- ASCII string sequence that represents the firmware version  
number string.  
cdd.ee  
mm/dd/yy  
iiii  
- The number of 4KB blocks of DRAM memory.  
vvvv  
- The number of 4KB blocks of DRAM available for  
configuration.  
X:  
- ASCII character identifying a DRAM module followed by an  
ASCII colon (:). If no Internal Module is present, this field  
and its associated legend will not appear.  
xxxx  
ssss  
LLLL  
wwww  
gggg  
oo  
- The number of 4KB blocks of DRAM allocated as an Internal  
Module.  
- The number of 4 KB blocks of DRAM assigned to the smooth  
scalable font processor cache.  
- The number of 4 KB blocks of DRAM assigned to label print  
buffer.  
- Current maximum printable label width (in 100ths of an inch  
or millimeters).  
- Current printable length (in 100ths of an inch or millimeters),  
200 min. / 640 max.  
- Current label dimension unit’s designation: “IN” for inches or  
“MM” for millimeters.  
STX KR  
Reset Memory Configuration  
This command resets the printer’s DRAM configuration to default settings, see <STX> KM.  
<STX>KR<CR>  
Syntax:  
STX Kr  
Reset Resettable Counter  
This command resets the internal counter. The internal counter requires the Real Time Clock option.  
<STX>Kr<CR>  
Syntax:  
STX KS  
Memory Configuration, Scalable Font Cache  
See <STX>K.  
STX KW Memory Configuration, Printable Label Width  
See <STX>K.  
E-Class DPL Programmer’s Manual  
37  
Extended System Commands  
38  
E-Class DPL Programmer’s Manual  
Label-Formatting Commands  
Introduction  
The <STX>L command switches the printer from the System-Level Processor to the Label-Formatting  
Processor. All commands following the <STX>L are interpreted as label-formatting commands, and can  
be used to override default parameter values. Selectable parameter value defaults may be also reassigned  
via the Setup Menu, as defined in the corresponding Operator’s Manual. Label formats that contain no  
commands overriding printer default values will assume those defaults.  
:
Set Cut By Amount  
This command allows a predetermined number of labels to be printed before a cut is initiated, a  
useful feature when it is necessary to print an uncut batch of labels. Between 1 and 9999 labels may  
be printed before a cut is made. The amount must be smaller than the quantity of labels printed. The  
printer default is one.  
:nnnn  
Syntax:  
Where:  
nnnn  
- Is a four digit decimal number indicating the number of labels to  
be printed before a cut is performed.  
<STX>L<CR>  
:0005<CR>  
Sample:  
141100001000100SAMPLE LABEL<CR>  
Q0021<CR>  
E<CR>  
The sample instructs the printer to make a cut after 5, 10, and 20 labels have been printed. Label 21  
will be cut at the start of a subsequent label format (batch) unless a default (cut by amount) greater  
than one has been entered.  
Note: The cutter must be enabled and all mechanism interlocks closed for the cut operation.  
E-Class DPL Programmer’s Manual  
39  
Label-Formatting Commands  
A
Set Format Attribute  
This command specifies the type of formatting attribute to use when text strings, images, or bar codes  
intersect on the label. This command remains in effect until another format command is specified or  
until another label format (<STX>L) has begun.  
An  
Syntax:  
Where:  
n
-
Is attribute mode 1, 2, 3, or 5; see table below. The default is  
1, XOR Mode.  
<STX>L  
A3  
Sample:  
141100001000100DATAMAX<CR>  
141100001100110DATAMAX<CR>  
E
The sample sets the printer to Opaque Mode and produces one label.  
n
1
Attribute  
XOR  
Mode  
Description  
Example  
This is the default mode. The region where text strings,  
images, or bar codes intersect will not be printed. (An  
odd number of overlapping objects will print.)  
2
3
Transparent This optional mode allows the intersection of text  
Mode  
strings, images, and bar codes to print. This allows the  
user to print fields on top of one another.  
Opaque  
Mode  
Interacting text is obliterated by the text formatted last.  
Each character cell is treated as opaque. This mode is  
effective only in rotation 1. See Record Structure Types.  
5
Inverse  
Mode  
This mode allows inverse (white on black) printing.  
E.g., a proportionally sized border and background are  
printed similar to photographic negative. When text or  
images overlap in this mode, the effect is similar to the  
XOR attribute.  
Table 6-1: Format Attributes  
40  
E-Class DPL Programmer’s Manual  
Extended System Commands  
C
Set Column Offset Amount  
This command allows horizontal adjustment of the point where printing begins. The printer is  
instructed to print label formats nnnn units to the right of the position that the format specifies. This  
feature is useful when a single format is to be printed on labels containing preprinted information.  
Note: If using preprinted labels where the placement of the preprint data varies from label to  
label, the printed information may overlap the preprinted data.  
Cnnnn  
Syntax:  
Where:  
nnnn  
-
Is a four-digit number (0000-9999) for the column offset, in  
inches /100 or mm/10. The printer default is 0.  
<STX>L  
C0050  
Sample:  
141100001000100DATAMAX<CR>  
E
The sample prints a label shifted .5 inches to the right of the format, unless the printer is in metric  
mode.  
c
Set Cut By Amount  
This command is the same as the Set Cut By Amount command (:); however, only a two-digit value  
can be entered. This allows a predetermined number of labels to be printed before a cut is performed.  
One to 99 labels may be printed before a cut is made.  
cnn  
Syntax:  
Where:  
nn  
- Is a two-digit number indicating the number of labels to be printed  
before performing a cut. The printer default is one.  
<STX>L<CR>  
c07<CR>  
Sample:  
141100001000100SAMPLE LABEL<CR>  
Q0021<CR>  
E
The sample instructs the printer to make cuts after 7, 14, and 21 labels have been printed. See Label-  
Formatting Command ‘:’.  
Note: The cutter must be enabled and all mechanism interlocks closed for the cut operation.  
E-Class DPL Programmer’s Manual  
41  
Label-Formatting Commands  
D
Set Dot Size Width and Height  
This command is used to change the size of the printed dots of the printhead (print resolution). By  
changing the height of the dots, the maximum length of a label can be increased or decreased. See  
Appendix J.  
Note: D22 is the default value for all printers.  
Dwh  
w
Syntax:  
Where:  
- Is Dot Width multiplier 1 or 2.  
h
- Is Dot Height multiplier 1, 2, or 3.  
E
Terminate Label-Formatting Mode and Print  
This command causes the printer, when the processing Label-Formatting commands, to terminate the  
Label-Formatting Mode then generate, print, and feed a label. The label generated will be based on  
whatever data has been received to that point, even if no printable data has been received. Other  
termination commands are ‘X’ and ‘s’. Commands sent to the printer after the Terminate Label  
command must be of the Immediate, System-Level, or Font Download type.  
E
Syntax:  
Sample:  
<STX>L<CR>  
121100000000000Testing<CR>  
E<CR>  
The sample label format will print one label.  
42  
E-Class DPL Programmer’s Manual  
Extended System Commands  
F
Font Attributes  
This command extends the text presentation capabilities (bold and/or italic) of scalable fonts. The  
selected font attribute remains in effect, modifying the font attributes of subsequent DPL text records  
within the label format, until the command is turned off or until the label format is terminated with  
the ‘E’ ‘s’ or ‘X’ command. All label formats begin by default with both font attributes disabled.  
Note: These commands are only valid for “scalable” fonts, such as downloaded TrueType  
scalable fonts (or optional Internal Font 9, S00 and S01 with appropriate optional font sets).  
Fax  
a
Syntax:  
Where:  
- Is font attribute B - Bold, I - Italic  
- Is minus ‘-’ disable, plus ‘+’ enable.  
x
<STX>L  
D11  
Sample:  
1911SA001000080P015P015ABCDEF  
FB+  
1911SA001500080P015P015ABCDEF  
FB-  
FI+  
1911SA002000080P015P015ABCDEF  
FI-  
1911SA002500080P018P018E-CLASS  
E
The sample illustrated above will print one label, shown right. Note  
that to print the sample, a scalable font with ID ‘A0’ was downloaded  
to the printer prior to sending the label format datastream.  
E-Class DPL Programmer’s Manual  
43  
Label-Formatting Commands  
f
Set Present Speed  
This command controls the rate at which the present distance is positioned, allowing the media  
movement to be slowed during ‘presentation’ (the distance traveled after printing is completed to the  
label stop position). This command is used only within the context of a label format. The speed  
assigned is retained until another label format is received or until power is removed; if a subsequent  
format does not contain a present speed command then the present speed reverts to the slew speed.  
fa  
Syntax:  
Where:  
a
-
Is a single alpha character representing a speed, limited by the  
slew speed range; see Appendix K. The default is the slew speed.  
<STX>LD11H30PGSG  
fA  
Sample:  
191100200830165Fixed Data Field 1  
E
<STX>L  
191100200830165Fixed Data Field 1  
E
The sample prints two labels; the first label has present speed of 1 inch per second, while the second  
reverts to the slew speed of 4 inches per second.  
G
Place Data in Global Register  
This command saves the print data of a print format record in a global register (temporary storage).  
This data can then be retrieved and copied to another record in the same label format using the  
Special Label-Formatting Command <STX>S. Global registers are named in the order received,  
beginning with A and ending at P; and are incremented with each instance of G command use.  
G
Syntax:  
Sample:  
<STX>L<CR>  
121100000000000Testing<CR>  
G<CR>  
1A2210001000000<STX>SA<CR>  
E<CR>  
The sample stores, retrieves and prints the data in global register A. One label is printed with  
“Testing” in two locations.  
44  
E-Class DPL Programmer’s Manual  
Extended System Commands  
H
Select Heat Setting  
This command changes the “on time” of the printhead elements. The factory default setting is 10.  
Increasing or decreasing this value causes an according change in the amount of heat applied by the  
printhead to the media surface, resulting in a lightening or darkening of the contrast on the printed  
label. This command, helpful when using different media types where each requires a different  
amount of heat to properly image the media, allows a heat adjustment per the application.  
Hnn  
Syntax:  
Where:  
Sample:  
nn  
- Is a two-digit heat value, 00-30 (see note below).  
<STX>L<CR>  
H15<CR>  
141100001000100SAMPLE LABEL<CR>  
E
The sample sets the printer for a heat value of 15 and prints one label.  
Note: The Darkness Potentiometer, while providing subtle changes, is intended to be used to  
match print contrast levels following printhead replacements.  
M
Select Mirror Mode  
This command instructs the printer to “mirror” all subsequent print field records by toggling a  
mirroring mode. Mirrored fields are transposed visually as if the object is viewed in a mirror.  
M
Syntax:  
Sample:  
<STX>L  
161100003200010 NOT MIRRORED<CR>  
M<CR>  
161100003000400 MIRRORED<CR>  
E
Printed result:  
E-Class DPL Programmer’s Manual  
45  
Label-Formatting Commands  
m
Set Metric Mode  
This command sets the printer to measure in metric-based units (e.g., a column offset of 0010 will be  
interpreted as 1.0 mm). All printers default to imperial (inch) mode.  
m
Syntax:  
Sample:  
<STX>L<CR>  
m
141100001000100SAMPLE LABEL<CR>  
E
The sample prints the text (SAMPLE LABEL) starting at location coordinates 10.0 mm, 10.0 mm.  
n
Set Imperial (Inch) Mode  
This command sets the printer to measure in inch-based units. All printers default to imperial units.  
n
Syntax:  
Sample:  
<STX>L<CR>  
n
141100001000100SAMPLE LABEL<CR>  
E
The sample prints the text (SAMPLE LABEL) starting at location coordinates 1.0 inch, 1.0 inch.  
P
Set Print Speed  
This command controls the rate at which label printing is performed.  
Pa  
Syntax:  
Where:  
a
- Is a single alpha character representing a speed; see Appendix K  
for valid ranges.  
<STX>L  
PC  
Sample:  
141100001000100LABEL1<CR>  
E
<STX>L  
141100001000100LABEL2>CR>  
E
The sample produces two labels, the first at a print speed of 2 inches per second and the second at  
the printer default.  
46  
E-Class DPL Programmer’s Manual  
Extended System Commands  
p
Set Backfeed Speed  
This command, typically used in conjunction with the Cut or Peel and Present operations, controls  
the rate at which the labels will reverse to align to the next start of print position. The setting remains  
in effect until another backfeed speed command is received or until the printer is reset.  
pa  
Syntax:  
Where:  
a
- Is a single alpha character representing a speed; see Appendix K  
for valid ranges.  
<STX>L  
pF  
Sample:  
The above sample sets the printer to backfeed at 3.5 inches per second.  
Q
Set Print Quantity  
This command sets the number of the label copies to be printed. A one to five digit value is allowed,  
if the command is delimited by a carriage return <CR>. This permits host applications to generate  
label quantity commands without the need to pad leading zeros. (A four-digit command value does  
not need to be <CR> terminated.)  
Qnnnnn  
Syntax:  
Where:  
nnnnn  
- Is a one to five-digit delimited value setting for the number of  
labels to be printed. The default value is one.  
<STX>L  
Sample:  
121100000000000Testing<CR>  
Q20<CR>  
E<CR>  
The above sample will print a batch of 20 identical labels.  
E-Class DPL Programmer’s Manual  
47  
Label-Formatting Commands  
R
Set Row Offset Amount  
This command allows vertical adjustment of the point where printing begins. The printer is instructed  
to print label formats nnnn units above the position that the format specifies. This feature is useful  
when a single format is to be printed on labels containing preprinted information.  
Note: If using preprinted labels where the placement of the preprint data varies from label to  
label, the printed information may overlap the preprinted data.  
Rnnnn  
Syntax:  
Where:  
nnnn  
- Is a four-digit number (0000-9999) for the row offset, in  
inches/100 or millimeters/10. The printer default is 0.  
<STX>L  
R0037<CR>  
Sample:  
141100001000100SAMPLE LABEL<CR>  
E
The sample prints a label with a row offset amount of .37 of an inch, unless in metric mode.  
r
Recall Stored Label Format  
This command is used to retrieve label formats stored on a memory module.  
rnn…n  
Syntax:  
Where:  
nn…n  
- Is the label name, up to 16 characters in length.  
The samples below explain different ways to recall and print a label format. (To view a memory  
module’s directory of label formats use the <STX>W command.)  
String Sent:  
Printer Interpretation:  
<STX>L<CR>  
rTEST<CR>  
Q0002<CR>  
E<CR>  
Sample 1:  
Sample 2:  
Sample 3:  
Begin label format  
Retrieve format named TEST  
Quantity requested = 2  
Terminate formatting and print  
<STX>L<CR>  
rTEST<CR>  
X<CR>  
Begin label format  
Retrieve format named test  
Terminate formatting  
Print  
<STX>G<CR>  
<STX>L<CR>  
D11<CR>  
PO<CR>  
SO<CR>  
rTEST<CR>  
E<CR>  
Begin label format  
Dot size = 1x1  
Print speed 0  
Slew speed 0  
Retrieve format named test  
Terminate formatting and print  
48  
E-Class DPL Programmer’s Manual  
Extended System Commands  
S
Set Slew Speed  
This command controls the rate at which the label is moved through non-printed areas. The setting  
remains unchanged unless another slew speed command is received or until the printer is reset.  
Sa  
Syntax:  
Where:  
a
- Is a single alpha character representing a speed; see Appendix K  
for valid ranges.  
<STX>L  
SE  
Sample:  
141100001000100LABEL1<CR>  
E
<STX>L  
1411000010001000LABEL2<CR>  
E
The sample sets the slew speed to 3 inches per second (76 mmps), and prints two labels. The slew  
speed for the second label is the same as the first.  
s
Store Label Format In Module  
This command stores a label format to a specified module. Supplying the module name (see  
Appendix J for valid designators) will store the label to that module; otherwise, using C will cause  
the label format to be stored in the selected default module (see <STX>X.). In addition, this  
command terminates the Label-Formatting Command.  
Sann…n  
Syntax:  
Where:  
a
- Is the module designator representing a single character module  
name; see Appendix J.  
nn…n  
- Represents the name of the label (maximum 16 characters).  
<STX>L<CR>  
D11<CR>  
Sample:  
191100501000000123456789012<CR>  
1911005020000001234567<CR>  
191100500000000Sample<CR>  
1X1100000000000B250250002002<CR>  
Q0001<CR>  
sATEST<CR>  
The example stores a format in memory module A and names it ‘TEST’. (To recall a label format  
from the module use the ‘r’ command.)  
E-Class DPL Programmer’s Manual  
49  
Label-Formatting Commands  
T
Set Field Data Line Terminator  
This command, intended for use with record types that accept binary data (e.g., PDF417), allows  
special binary control codes (e.g., a carriage return) to be embedded in the printed data by setting an  
alternate data line terminator. It remains valid only for the next format record, then resumes the  
defaults value. See Alternate Control Code Mode.  
Tnn  
Syntax:  
Where:  
nn  
- Is an ASCII two-character representation of a HEX code to be used  
for the end of data terminator.  
<STX>L<CR>  
T00<CR>  
Sample:  
191100200000000TEST<NULL>  
141100001000100TERMINATOR<CR>  
Q0001<CR>  
E<CR>  
The sample sets the printer to use a NULL terminator (ASCII NULL: HEX 00) for the data line  
termination code. The terminator is immediately restored to a carriage return <CR>, as seen in the  
format record containing the text ‘TERMINATOR’.  
U
Mark Previous Field as a String Replacement Field  
This command controls the way replacement data is formatted. Specifying a field as a string  
replacement for dynamic fields, and not for static fields, will optimize label throughput. See the  
<STX>U command.  
Note: The data string length of any replacement is set by the length of the original string; both must  
be equal. The data being used when created must be valid for the font type being selected.  
U
Syntax:  
Sample:  
<STX>L  
D11  
121100001000000123456789012<CR>  
U<CR>  
1211000020000001234567<CR>  
U<CR>  
161100000000000Sample<CR>  
1X1100000000000B250250002002<CR>  
Q0001  
E
<STX>U01ABCDEFGHIJKL<CR>  
<STX>U028901234<CR>  
<STX>G  
50  
E-Class DPL Programmer’s Manual  
Extended System Commands  
The sample sets up the label format for register loading and prints two labels. The first two of the  
four format records have been designated as replacement fields. The second label is generated with  
System-Level field-replacement commands and prints the last label.  
Note: The data string length of any register is set by the length of the string when it was created  
and the new string must be the same length as the old string. The data being used when it  
is created must be valid for the font type being used.  
X
Terminate Label-Formatting Mode without Printing  
This command causes the printer, when in label-formatting mode, to immediately switch to the  
system command mode and generate a label format based on the data received at that point.  
However, unlike the ‘E’ command, it will not print a label. (Other termination commands are the ‘E’  
and ‘s’.)  
X
Syntax:  
Sample:  
<STX>L<CR>  
141100001000100SAMPLE<CR>  
X<CR>  
The sample will result in a label format, but no label will be printed.  
y
Select Font Symbol Set  
This command, like the <STX>y, selects the scalable font symbol set. The selected symbol set  
remains active until another symbol set is selected; see the <STX>y for details.  
ySxx  
Syntax:  
Where:  
S
- Byte size designation; see Appendix H  
S = Single-byte symbol sets.  
U = Double-byte symbol sets (as equipped)  
xx  
- Symbol set selection.  
<STX>L  
ySSW<CR>  
Sample:  
The sample selects the Swedish symbol set for use in succeeding format records using scalable fonts.  
E-Class DPL Programmer’s Manual  
51  
Label-Formatting Commands  
z
Zero (Ø) Conversion to “0”  
This command removes the slash zero in fonts 0 to 8, and in the human readable field (if any) of the  
bar codes A to Z. The command applies only to format records containing those fonts and bar codes,  
and is effective only for the label format in which it appears.  
Note: None of the smooth fonts (i.e., font 9) has the slash zero; also, this command will have no  
effect on scalable fonts.  
z
Syntax:  
Sample:  
<STX>L  
z
121100000000000Test0000<CR>  
E
+ (>)  
Make Last Field Entered Increment Numeric (Alphanumeric)  
This command, useful in printing sequenced labels, causes the printer to automatically increment a  
field on the labels in a batch. The numeric data in the field will increment by the value assigned after  
the plus sign (+) each time a label is produced (or the greater than character [>] can be substituted to  
make the field increment alphabetically). This command is effective only on the label format record  
that it follows, and is intended to be used with the Q, <STX>E or <STX>G commands.  
*pii  
Syntax:  
Where:  
*
p
ii  
- Is + for numeric increment, or > for alphanumeric increment.  
- Is the fill character for the leftmost character of the field.  
- Is the amount to increment the field.  
<STX>L<CR>  
13220000000000012345<CR>  
+01<CR>  
Sample:  
Q0003<CR>  
E<CR>  
The sample will generate a single field label format that prints the initial label with a value of 12345,  
and then increments that number by one for the next two labels.  
Embedding  
Numeric strings for incrementing may also be embedded between alphabetic characters (e.g., when  
systems require alphanumeric barcodes with alphabetic prefixes or suffixes).  
52  
E-Class DPL Programmer’s Manual  
Extended System Commands  
<STX>L<CR>  
161100000100010AB0001CD<CR>  
Sample:  
+100<CR>  
Q0003<CR>  
E<CR>  
The sample will print three labels, incrementing 0001 by 1 on each label with AB and CD remaining  
untouched: AB0001CD, AB0002CD, AB0003CD. Note that the increment value has one leading  
blank and two trailing zeros; the blank is a pad character with no consequences in this example, and  
the trailing zeroes are placeholders which leave CD unchanged.  
- (<)  
Make Last Field Entered Decrement Numeric (Alphanumeric)  
This command, useful in printing sequenced labels, causes the printer to automatically decrement a  
field on the labels in a batch. The numeric data in the field will decrement by the value assigned after  
the minus (-) sign each time a label is produced (or the less than character [<] can be substituted to  
make the field decrement alphabetically). This command is effective only on the label format record  
that it follows, and is intended to be used with the Q, <STX>E or <STX>G commands.  
*pii  
*
Syntax:  
Where:  
- Is - for numeric decrement, or < for alphanumeric decrement.  
- Is the fill character for the leftmost character of the field.  
- Is the amount by which to decrement the field.  
p
ii  
<STX>L<CR>  
132200000000000123AB<CR>  
<01<CR>  
Sample:  
Q0003<CR>  
E<CR>  
The sample will generate a single field label format that prints the initial label with a value of  
123AB, and then decrements that number by one for the next two labels.  
Embedding  
Numeric strings for decrementing may also be embedded between alphabetic characters (e.g., when  
systems require alphanumeric barcodes with alphabetic prefixes or suffixes).  
<STX>L<CR>  
Sample:  
1611000001000101000CD<CR>  
-100<CR>  
Q0003<CR>  
E<CR>  
The sample will print three labels: 1000CD, 999CD, and 998CD. Note that the pad character is a  
placeholder for digits removed from the left side in the subtraction process. When a fixed pitch font  
(where all characters have the same width) is used, the justification of the rightmost character is  
sustained regardless of the number of digits replaced by the pad character on the left side.  
E-Class DPL Programmer’s Manual  
53  
Label-Formatting Commands  
^
Set Count by Amount  
This command allows applications using the increment / decrement field command to print more than  
one label with the same field value before the field data is updated. All printers default to 1.  
Note: This command can only be issued once per label format. In addition, when alternate  
Control Codes are enabled, the ^ character must be replaced by the @ character  
(hexadecimal 0x40). See Control Codes.  
^nn  
^
Syntax:  
Where:  
- May be 0x55 or 0x40, see Control Codes.  
nn  
- Is a two-digit value that specifies the number of labels to be  
generated before incrementing (or decrementing) the field value.  
<STX>L<CR>  
13220000000000012345<CR>  
-01<CR>  
Sample:  
^02<CR>  
Q0006<CR>  
E<CR>  
The sample prints two labels containing the same field value before decrementing the field. Six  
labels are printed.  
Special Label-Formatting Commands  
Two Special Label-Formatting Commands, the <STX> S and the <STX> T, are entered directly into the  
data field of label format records. Do not confuse them with System-Level Commands because the same  
control character is used. If alternate control codes are enabled the <STX> becomes ‘~’ (hexadecimal  
0x7E); see Control Codes.  
Label-Formatting Character  
<STX>S  
Command Description  
Recall global data and place in field  
Print time and date  
<STX>T  
Table 6-2: Special Label-Formatting Commands  
54  
E-Class DPL Programmer’s Manual  
Extended System Commands  
STX S  
Recall Global Data And Place In Field  
This command, when in the format record data field, places data from a specified global register into  
the data field. See the G command.  
<STX>Sn  
Syntax:  
Where:  
n
-
Specifies the global register (A P) that contains the data to  
place into the data field.  
<STX>L<CR>  
Sample:  
121100000000000DMX<CR>  
G<CR>  
1A2210001000000<STX>SA<CR>  
E<CR>  
The sample places the string “DMX” into the next available global register (A), and then line 4 is  
effectively replaced by the data from global register A.  
STX T  
Print Time and Date  
This command, using string characters and markers, allows time and date data to be selected and  
retrieved from the printer’s internal clock. In addition, the <STX>T may be preceded by data to be  
printed/encoded, and/or the string may now be terminated by an <STX> command and then followed  
by more data terminated by a <CR>. The string characters/markers are not printed; instead, the  
printed label will show a corresponding print value.  
Note: When using substitution you must ensure the converted string produces valid characters  
for the selected bar code / font.  
<STX>Tstring<CR>  
string  
Print  
Syntax:  
Where:  
- Is any set of characters, A - Z and a – h. See the table below.  
String  
Characters  
A
String  
Markers  
VW  
Print  
Values  
Hour in the 24 hour format  
Hour in the 12 hour format  
Minutes  
Values  
Day of the week (Mon = 1, Sun = 7)  
Day of the week name  
Month number  
BCD  
EF  
XY  
Za  
GH…O  
PQ  
gh  
bc  
Month name  
Seconds  
AM or PM  
Day  
RSTU  
def  
Year  
Julian date  
Table 6-3: Time and Date String Characters  
Note: The sample listings below assume a current printer date of December 21, 1998.  
E-Class DPL Programmer’s Manual  
55  
Label-Formatting Commands  
<STX>L<CR>  
Sample 1:  
121100001000100<STX>TBCD GHI PQ, TU<CR>  
E<CR>  
Sample 1 will print SUN DEC 21, 98 on a label.  
<STX>L<CR>  
Sample 2:  
191100100100010<STX>TEF/PQ<CR>  
E<CR>  
Sample 2 will print 12/21 on a label.  
<STX>L<CR>  
Sample 3:  
191100100100010ABC <STX>TEF/PQ<STX> DEF<CR>  
E<CR>  
Sample 3 will print ABC 12/21 DEF on a label. (This illustrates a method of embedding the time  
string. The string must be terminated by an <STX>.)  
56  
E-Class DPL Programmer’s Manual  
Font Loading Commands  
Introduction  
The commands used for font loading are usually generated by font creation software; however, the  
assigned font ID number command must be sent to the printer before the font file. All Font Loading  
Commands begin with <ESC> (ASCII control character 27 [decimal]).  
The downloaded font will be stored in the default module (refer to the <STX>X command). The  
commands in the table below are listed in their order of appearance, top to bottom, during font  
downloading. The <SOH>D command must be sent prior to downloading a font.  
Command  
*c###D  
)s#Wnn…n  
*c#E  
Description  
Assign Font ID Number  
Font Descriptor  
Character Code  
(s#W  
Character Download Data  
Table 7-1: Font-Loading Commands  
*c###D  
Assign Font ID Number  
This command is the first command required for downloading a font to either DRAM or Flash  
memory. Esc represents the ASCII control character 27.  
<ESC>*c###D  
Syntax:  
Where:  
###  
- Is the font ID numbers 100-999. (000-099 are reserved for  
resident fonts.)  
)s###W  
Font Descriptor  
This command (typically first data in a font file) contains all of the information about the font  
contained in the file. Different font generation software will create different length header  
information, but the initial 64 bytes will remain consistent with the PCL-4 (HP LaserJet II) format.  
<ESC>)s###Wdd…d  
Syntax:  
Where:  
###  
- Is the number of bytes of font descriptor data from 1 to 3 ASCII  
decimal digits.  
dd…d  
- Is the descriptor.  
E-Class DPL Programmer’s Manual  
57  
Font-Loading Commands  
*c###E  
Character Code  
This code is the ASCII decimal value corresponding to the next downloaded character.  
<ESC>*c###E  
###  
Syntax:  
Where:  
- Is the ASCII value of the character, three digits maximum, 0 to  
999.  
(s#W  
Character Download Data  
This command contains all of the information for one downloaded character.  
<ESC>(s###Wnn…n  
Syntax:  
Where:  
###  
- Is the number of bytes of bit-mapped data, three digits maximum,  
1 to 999.  
nn…n  
- Is the bit-mapped data.  
58  
E-Class DPL Programmer’s Manual  
Generating Label Formats  
Introduction  
This section explains the use of the different fields in a print format record.  
Format Record Commands  
Table 8-1 is an example of a label format as seen by the printer, while the figure below is the label  
generated from this format. The printer receives the data sequentially, left to right, top to bottom.  
String Sent to Printer  
Printer Interpretation  
<STX>L<CR>  
D11<CR>  
Begin label format  
Set dot size  
121100000050005Home Position<CR>  
191100602000200ROTATION 1<CR>  
291100602000200ROTATION 2<CR>  
391100602000200ROTATION 3<CR>  
491100602000200ROTATION 4<CR>  
1A3104003000260123456<CR>  
4a6210002500140123456<CR>  
1X1100000000000B400400003003<CR>  
1X1100002000000L400001<CR>  
1X1100000000200L001400<CR>  
121100004100010Printhead Location<CR>  
Q0001<CR>  
Format text  
Format text  
Format text  
Format text  
Format text  
Format bar code with text  
Format bar code  
Format box  
Format line  
Format line  
Format text  
Number of labels  
End formatting, begin print  
E<CR>  
Table 8-1: Sample Label Format  
Note: This example assumes that the printer is in ‘inch’ mode (<STX>n).  
Printhead Location  
Media  
Movement  
Home Position  
E-Class DPL Programmer’s Manual  
59  
Generating Label Formats  
The first line in the sample format (Table 8-1) is the System-Level Command directing the printer to  
begin label formatting. (Other System-Level Commands may precede the <STX>L for printer setup.)  
Lines 2, 14, and 15 are Label-Formatting Commands. Line 15 is the exit and print command. The  
remaining lines (3-13) are print format records, explained in this chapter.  
A record is a data string that contains the information to be printed on the label(s). Records are the  
building blocks of label formats. Every record must end with a termination character (usually a carriage  
return, <CR>). Omitting termination characters will result in the concatenation of records. Omitting the  
carriage return that precedes the termination character E, which is necessary to complete the label  
formatting and begin printing, will cause the printer to continue interpreting all subsequent data as label  
print format records.  
Generating Records  
Every record is made of three parts: (1) A header that is 15 bytes in length, (2) the data to be printed,  
and (3) a termination character (e.g., <CR>) marking the end of the field. The header is used to select  
the appearance of the data when printed by specifying rotation, font type, size, and position. Every  
header contains similar information, but this information may be used in different ways by different  
types of records. The six record types are:  
1. Internal Bit-Mapped Font  
2. Smooth Font (Simulated)  
3. Scalable Font  
4. Bar code  
5. Images  
6. Graphics  
The Structure of a Record  
The basic structure of the record is described below. For details regarding the various interpretations  
of the six types see Record Structure Types.  
The third line of the label format example in Table 8-1 consists of the following:  
121100000050005HOME POSITION<CR>  
This string comprises a complete record, shown below, divided into its three basic component parts.  
Header  
Data String  
Termination Character  
121100000050005  
HOME POSITION  
<CR>  
Table 8-2: Record Structure Components  
The record conforms to the following fixed field format (spaces added for visual clarity). Identifying  
lower case letters have been placed below the field values for reference in the following sections:  
1 2 1 1 000  
a b c d eee  
0005  
ffff  
0005  
gggg  
HOME POSITION  
[hhhh iiii] jj…j  
<CR>  
Termination character  
60  
E-Class DPL Programmer’s Manual  
Generating Label Formats  
Location  
Record Type  
Within  
Record  
Internal Bit-  
Mapped Font  
Rotation  
Font ID  
Width  
Multiplier  
Height  
Smooth  
Scalable  
Font  
Rotation  
Bar  
Images  
Rotation  
Graphics  
Font  
Rotation  
9
Code  
Rotation  
Bar Code  
Wide Bar  
a
b
c
1
X
1
9
Y
Width  
Width  
Width  
Multiplier  
Multiplier  
Height  
Multiplier  
Multiplier  
Height  
Multiplier  
d
Narrow Bar Height  
Multiplier  
000  
1
Multiplier  
000  
eee  
font size/ID ID  
Bar Code  
Height  
000  
ffff  
gggg  
Row  
Row  
Row  
Row  
Row  
Row  
Position  
Column  
Position  
N/A  
N/A  
Data String  
Position  
Column  
Position  
N/A  
Position  
Column  
Position  
Font height N/A  
Font width N/A  
Position  
Column  
Position  
Position  
Column  
Position  
N/A  
Position  
Column  
Position  
N/A  
hhhh  
iiii  
jj…j  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
Data String Data String Data String Image Name Graphic  
Specifiers  
Table 8-3: Record Type Structure  
In Table 8-3, the record structure is shown for each of the record types. The left-most column shows  
the locations of all characters in the record, and corresponds to the example above the table. Each  
record structure interprets the characters of the record in its own way, though some of the characters’  
interpretations are identical across all record types. For example, the characters ffff are interpreted  
as Row Position in all record types. While c is a Width Multiplier for Internal Bit-Mapped Font,  
Smooth Font, Scalable Font, and Image record types, it has other interpretations for Bar Code and  
Graphics record types.  
The Header Fields  
Each of the fields in the record header is generally described below. Please reference the detailed  
descriptions under Record Structure Types for variations. The field name titles of the following  
paragraphs are preceded with a reference letter from Table 8-3. All characters sent to the printer  
within the header fields are ASCII, alphanumeric.  
a:  
Rotation  
The first field of a header is a single ASCII character that selects the degree of rotation for the  
data to be printed on a label. Valid rotation values are 1 (0º); 2 (90º); 3 (180º); and 4 (270º)  
clockwise. Figure 8-1 shows the direction and amount of rotation clockwise, relative to the label  
feed direction. The bottom left corner of the object is the pivot point.  
b:  
Fonts, Bar Codes, Graphics and Images  
The second field (b) determines how the rest of the fields are interpreted, as shown in the table  
below. Values 0 through 9 select human-readable fonts. 0 through 8 will select standard Datamax  
fonts, value 9 selects the CG Triumvirate smooth scalable font (internal) or scalable fonts. When  
9 is used to select a scalable font, the font size (font I.D. number) is chosen by entering a value in  
the height field eee.  
E-Class DPL Programmer’s Manual  
61  
Generating Label Formats  
Values A through z select barcodes. Values A through T (uppercase) will print barcodes with  
human-readable interpretations. Values a through z (lowercase), will print barcodes only.  
Value W requires two additional characters to specify the Barcode/Font ID.  
A font field value X selects a drawing object (line, box, circle or polygon), and field value Y is  
used to print an image stored in a module.  
Font Field Value (b)  
Interpretation  
0-9  
A-T  
a-z  
Wxx  
X
Font  
Barcode with human readable text.  
Barcode without human readable text.  
Barcode/Font Expansion  
Line, Box, Polygon, Circle  
Image  
Y
Table 8-4: Font Field Interpretations  
c:  
Width Multiplier  
Values 1-9 and A-O represent multiplication factors (base 25 numbers). For human-readable  
fonts, the width multiplier represents the number of times the selected font dot tables are  
multiplied and has no effect on the character height. For barcodes, this character specifies the  
wide bar width or ratio. Values 1 through 9 and A through O will give a wide bar width of from  
0.0033” (0.085mm) to 0.792” (2.011mm) at a resolution dependent upon the printer model. See  
Appendix J.  
d:  
Height Multiplier  
The height multiplier has the same range and function as the width multiplier, but vertical. When  
used in the context of barcodes, this field is the ratio denominator, or the small bar (module)  
width. Values 1 through 9 and A through O will give a narrow bar width of one dot (dot size =  
1/printhead resolution) to 24 dots. The narrow bar width resolution and range are dependent upon  
the printhead resolution, see table below. A “dot multiplier” command can also be used to change  
the printed dot size (see Label-Formatting Command ‘D’ and Appendix J).  
eee: Bar Code Height (Font Size/Selection)  
This field has interpretations dependent upon the value of the font b field, as shown below.  
b Font Field Value  
eee Field Range  
eee Field Interpretation  
0-8  
9
000  
Not used –Internal Bitmapped Font  
000 – 999, A04 – A72, S00 – S9z, Font Height; Font Selection  
U00-U9z, u00 – u9z  
A-T  
a-z  
Wxx  
X,Y  
000 – 999  
000 – 999  
000 – 999  
000  
Barcode Height (with human readable)  
Barcode Height  
Barcode Height (with human readable)  
Not Used  
Table 8-5: Bar Code Height Field Interpretations  
62  
E-Class DPL Programmer’s Manual  
Generating Label Formats  
ffff: Row Position  
The lower left corner of a label is considered the “home position”, see Figure 8-1. The row  
position field is a vertical coordinate that determines how far above the home position the data is  
to be printed. Field data is interpreted in hundredths of an inch or tenths of millimeters.  
gggg: Column Position  
This field is a horizontal coordinate that determines how far to the right of “home position” the  
data will be printed. Appendix J lists the maximum values of the gggg field.  
hhhh: Optional Scalable Font Height  
The height of a scalable font can be specified in two ways, points or dots. To specify the height  
in points the first character of the field is a ‘P’ followed by the number of points, 004 to 999  
points. To specify the size in dots, all four characters must be numeric. This field must be  
specified for scalable fonts. See note below.  
iiii: Optional Scalable Font Width  
The width of a scalable font can be specified in two ways, points or dots. To specify the width in  
points, the first character of the field is a ‘P’ followed by the number of points, 004 to 999 points.  
To specify the size in dots, all four characters must be numeric. This field must be specified for  
scalable fonts. See note below.  
Note: To ensure that the data stream is portable to different Datamax printers, specify the  
font size in points. If the font is specified in dots, it will output differently on printers with  
different DPI/MMPI resolutions. There are 72.307 points per 1 inch (2.847 mm).  
jj…j: Data Field  
The final field contains the data that will actually be printed on the label. A string of data can be  
up to 255 characters in length, (except when using the PDF 417 barcode, which may be up to  
3000 characters long) ending with a carriage return. Characters placed in the data field will be  
printed as long as they fall within the physical range of the printhead. See Appendix J for a  
listing by printer.  
Record Structure Types  
Each of the six record types has its own field structure as described in the following tables. These  
record types allow quick reference to the field types and their valid data inputs for the field. There  
are similar, but unique, record structures for each: internal bit-mapped fonts, internal smooth fonts,  
downloaded bit-mapped fonts, scalable fonts, bar codes, images, and graphics. The field location  
identifiers in the tables that follow are the same as those in Table 8-3.  
1. Internal Bit-Mapped Fonts  
This record type is used for internal bitmapped fonts (see Tables C-1, C-2 and C-3).  
When a 0 through 8 is entered in field b, then the height field eee is not used. The bitmapped fonts  
include 8 different fonts (see Appendix C). The character mapping for these fonts is shown in  
Appendix A or a subset thereof.  
E-Class DPL Programmer’s Manual  
63  
Generating Label Formats  
Field  
a
b
c
d
eee  
ffff  
gggg  
jj…j  
Valid Inputs  
Meaning  
1, 2, 3 and 4  
Rotation  
Font  
0 to 8; see Appendix C.  
1 to 9 and A to O  
1 to 9 and A to O  
000  
Width Multiplier  
Height Multiplier  
N/A  
0000 to 9999  
Row  
Column  
0000 to 9999, see Appendix J.  
Valid ASCII character string up to 255 characters followed Data  
by a termination character.  
Table 8-6: Internal Bit-mapped Font Record Structure  
2. Smooth Font, and Downloaded Bit-Mapped Fonts  
This record type is used for internal smooth fonts (CG Triumvirate – see Table C-4) or a bit-mapped  
font downloaded to a memory module (see Font-Loading Commands).  
When 9 is entered in field b, then the height field eee determines the font. The internal smooth font  
has up to 13 font sizes (see Appendix C). Values 100 through 999 select individual fonts stored in  
DRAM or Flash memory. These include downloaded bit-mapped fonts; see Table 8-7. Use eee values  
of 096 – 099 for Kanji fonts, if equipped (see Appendix I). The character mapping for these fonts is  
shown in Appendix A or a subset thereof.  
Field  
a
b
Valid Inputs  
Meaning  
1, 2, 3 and 4  
9
Rotation  
Fixed Value  
c
d
Width Multiplier  
Height Multiplier  
1 to 9 and A to O  
1 to 9 and A to O  
eee  
ffff  
gggg  
jj…j  
000 to 999 (000 to 099 Reserved), A04 to A72, x04 – x72* Font/Size  
0000 to 9999  
Row  
0000 to 9999; see Appendix J.  
Column  
Valid ASCII character string up to 255 characters Data  
followed by a termination character.  
*Where x is an upper case letter; see Appendices H and K.  
Table 8-7: Smooth Font Record Structure  
3. Scalable Fonts  
The Smooth Scalable Font Technology has been licensed from AGFA. Both IntelliFont (.CDI) and  
TrueType (.TTF) Scalable Font file formats are supported. The eee field identifies the scalable font,  
and data type - normal (binary) or hex ASCII. Uppercase S or U - binary, lowercase u - Hex ASCII.  
See Appendix I for additional information. Values S00 to S9z, and U00 to U9z (u00 to u9z), select a  
scalable font, either internal or downloaded. S01 is used for the standard internal (resident) font.  
Field  
a
b
Valid Inputs  
Meaning  
1, 2, 3 and 4  
9
Rotation  
Fixed Value  
c
d
eee  
Width Multiplier  
Height Multiplier  
Font Data Type  
1 to 9 and A to O  
1 to 9 and A to O  
S00 to Szz, U00-Uzz, u00-uzz  
64  
E-Class DPL Programmer’s Manual  
Generating Label Formats  
Field  
ffff  
gggg  
hhhh  
iiii  
jj…j  
Valid Inputs  
Meaning  
0000 to 9999  
Row  
Column  
0000 to 9999, see Appendix J.  
P004-P999, 0016-4163*  
P004-P999, 0014-4163*  
Valid ASCII character string up to 255 characters Data  
followed by a termination character.  
Character Height, points, dots  
Character Width, points, dots  
*Character size specifications are printhead resolution dependent as shown in the following table.  
Table 8-8: Scalable Font Record Structure  
Printhead  
Character Size (dots)  
Resolution (DPI)  
Width  
16-2817  
14-4163  
Height  
16-2817  
16-4163  
203  
300  
Table 8-9: Scalable Character Size Ranges  
Note: A scalable font cache must be allocated to print. Minimum cache size is 15 (see  
<STX>KS for syntax). Double-byte fonts require five additional units of cache.  
4. Bar Codes  
Valid inputs for the bar code field b are letters. Uppercase letters will print a human-readable text  
below the bar code. Lowercase letters will print the bar code only. For example, entering a ‘p’ in  
the b field selects the Postnet bar code. Because the Postnet font does not provide human-readable  
data, the uppercase P is not valid. Other bar codes without a human-readable counterpart include u  
(MaxiCode), z (PDF417), etc. See Appendix F.  
For module-based bar codes, field d is the narrow bar width in dots (bar code module size). For  
consistent results in all rotations for bar codes of this type, field d and field c must have the same  
value. For ratio-based bar codes field c is the wide bar width in dots (the numerator); field d is the  
narrow bar width in dots (the denominator). The eee height field represents the bar code height.  
The valid range is from 001 to 999, which translates to bar heights ranging from 0.01inch  
(.254mm) to 9.99 inches (253.7mm). Bar codes that require additional parameters specified use the  
jj…j data field as the location for these parameters. See the Appendix G for specific bar code  
details.  
Field  
a
Valid Inputs  
Meaning  
Rotation  
1, 2, 3 and 4  
b [bb]  
A to Z and a to z (except P, u, v, z), or Wna, where: n is 1 to 9 Bar Code  
and a is A to S and a to s. No n is an implied 1.  
c
d
eee  
ffff  
gggg  
jj…j  
1 to 9 and A to O  
1 to 9 and A to O  
001 to 999  
0000 to 9999  
0000 to 9999, see Appendix J.  
Wide Bar  
Narrow Bar  
Symbol Height  
Row  
Column  
Valid ASCII character string up to 255 characters followed by a Data  
termination character.  
Table 8-10: Bar Code Record Structure  
E-Class DPL Programmer’s Manual  
65  
Generating Label Formats  
Placing a 0 (zero) in both c and d will cause the printer to use the default bar code ratio or module  
size. Placing a 000 (zero) in the symbol height field causes the printer to use the default bar code  
height.  
5. Images  
An image record is used to print an image that is stored in a memory module. Images can be  
printed only in rotation 1, (see Input Image Data <STX>I).  
Field  
a
b
Valid Inputs  
Meaning  
Fixed Value  
Image  
1
Y
c
d
eee  
ffff  
gggg  
jj…j  
Width Multiplier  
Height Multiplier  
Fixed Value  
Row  
1 to 9 and A to O  
1 to 9 and A to O  
000  
0000 to 9999  
0000 to 9999, see Appendix J.  
Column  
ASCII string, up to 16 characters followed by a termination Image Name  
character.  
Table 8-11: Image Fields  
6. Graphics  
Using graphics, the printer can produce lines, boxes, polygons, and circles. This function is  
selected by entering an X in field b. The values entered in the data field determine the sizes and  
shapes of the objects to be drawn. Forms can be created using shaded boxes, complex logos, or  
even a simple diagonal line without the need to download a graphics file to the printer. The  
following sub-sections describe how to generate each kind of graphic.  
Lines and Boxes  
Lines and boxes are drawn by values that determine column and row starting position, length,  
width, and wall thickness of the line or box (see Appendix J). All measurements are interpreted  
as inches/100 or millimeters/10, depending on the printer’s mode (see <STX>m). The data  
field jj…j is used to describe the line or box dimensions.  
Segment  
Valid Inputs  
Meaning  
Fixed value  
Line / Box  
Fixed Value  
Fixed Value  
Fixed Value  
Row  
a
b
c
1
X
1
1
d
eee  
ffff  
gggg  
jj...j  
000  
0000 to 9999  
0000 to 9999, see Appendix J.  
Lhhhvvv - Line Drawing  
Column  
Line *  
lhhhhvvvv - Line Drawing  
Bhhhvvvtttsss - Box Drawing  
Bhhhhvvvvttttssss - Box Drawing  
Line **  
Box ***  
Box ****  
Table 8-12: Line and Box Parameters  
66  
E-Class DPL Programmer’s Manual  
Generating Label Formats  
Lhhhvvv  
* LINES:  
Where:  
L
hhh  
vvv  
=
=
=
“L” and specifies line drawing,  
horizontal width of line,  
vertical height of line.  
lhhhhvvvv  
“l” and specifies line drawing,  
** LINES:  
Where:  
l
=
hhhh = horizontal width of line,  
vvvv = vertical height of line.  
Bhhhvvvbbbsss  
*** BOXES:  
Where:  
B
=
=
=
=
=
“B” and specifies box drawing,  
horizontal width of box,  
vertical height of box,  
thickness of bottom and top,  
thickness of sides.  
hhh  
vvv  
bbb  
sss  
bhhhhvvvvbbbbssss  
“b” specifies box drawing,  
**** BOXES:  
Where:  
b
=
hhhh = horizontal width of box,  
vvvv = vertical height of box,  
bbbb = thickness of bottom and top box edges,  
ssss = thickness of sides of box.  
Note: Lines are sometimes better understood as filled in boxes, while boxes are hollow.  
Polygons  
Polygons are created by defining the positions of the corners, specifying a number of data  
points that represent the vertices of the object, which can range from a simple line (two points),  
or a triangle (three points), to any free-form outline. Polygons may be filled with a variety of  
different patterns. All row/column specifiers are interpreted as inches/100 or millimeters/10  
depending on the printer mode, (see <STX>m).  
Record structure for a polygon (spaces have been added for readability):  
1 X 11 ppp rrrr cccc P ppp bbbb rrrr cccc rrrr cccc … <CR>  
Where:  
1
X
1
1
ppp  
rrrr  
cccc  
P
001  
Rotation (must be 1)  
Graphic field ID  
Multiplier (must be 1)  
Multiplier (must be 1)  
Fill Pattern #  
Row of Point 1  
Column of Point 1  
Polygon ID (Fixed Value)  
Fixed Value  
Fixed Value  
0001  
rrrr  
cccc  
rrrr  
cccc  
Row of Point 2  
Column of Point 2  
Row of Point 3  
Column of Point 3  
Additional Points  
Termination Character  
<CR>  
Table 8-13: Polygon Record Structure  
Note: The points must be specified in the order to be drawn; the last point specified is  
automatically connected to the first point to close the polygon. If only two points are  
specified, a single line will be drawn. See Label-Formatting Command A.  
E-Class DPL Programmer’s Manual  
67  
Generating Label Formats  
Circles  
A circle is created by defining by its center point and radius. Circles may be filled with a  
variety of different patterns. Row, column, and radius are interpreted as inches (100) or  
millimeters (10) depending on printer mode.  
Record structure for a circle (spaces have been added for readability):  
1 X 11 fff rrrr cccc C ppp bbbb rrrr <CR>  
Where:  
1
X
1
1
fff  
rrrr  
cccc  
C
001  
0001  
rrrr  
<CR>  
rotation (must be 1)  
graphic field  
multiplier (must be 1)  
multiplier (must be 1)  
fill pattern #  
column of the center point  
Circle ID (Fixed Value)  
Fixed Value  
Fixed Value  
radius of the circle  
termination character  
row of the center point  
Table 8-14: Circle Record Structure  
Available Fill Patterns for Polygons and Circles:  
0
no pattern  
1
solid black  
2
6% black  
3
12% black  
4
25% black  
5
38% black  
6
50% black  
7
little diamonds  
little circles  
right diagonal lines  
left diagonal lines  
small grid  
8
9
10  
11  
Figure 8-2: Fill Patterns  
68  
E-Class DPL Programmer’s Manual  
Generating Label Formats  
Examples (Spaces have been added in the record structure for readability):  
1. Triangle  
The record:  
1 X 11 000 0010 0010 P 001 0001 0040 0025 0010 0040<CR>  
Produces a triangle with no fill pattern:  
(row 0040, column 0025)  
(row 0010, column 0010)  
(row 0010, column 0040)  
2. Rectangle with Fill  
The record:  
1 X 11 004 0010 0010 P 001 0001 0050 0010 0050 0200 0010  
0200<CR>  
Produces a rectangle filled with pattern 4 (25% black):  
(row 0010, column 0010)  
(row 0050, column 0200)  
3. Circle  
The record:  
1 X 11 000 0100 0100 C 001 0001 0025<CR>  
Produces a circle centered at row 0100, column 0100 with a radius of 0025 and no fill  
pattern:  
4. Circle with Fill  
The record:  
1 X 11 009 0100 0100 C 001 0001 0025<CR>  
Produces a circle centered at row 0100, column 0100 with a radius of 0025 and filled with  
pattern 9 (right diagonal lines):  
E-Class DPL Programmer’s Manual  
69  
Generating Label Formats  
70  
E-Class DPL Programmer’s Manual  
Appendix A  
ASCII Control Chart  
Char  
Ctrl @ NUL  
Dec  
Hex  
00  
Char  
Dec  
32  
Hex  
20  
Char  
@
Dec  
64  
Hex  
40  
Char  
Dec  
96  
97  
98  
99  
Hex  
60  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
`
Ctrl A  
Ctrl B  
Ctrl C  
Ctrl D  
Ctrl E  
Ctrl F  
Ctrl G  
Ctrl H  
Ctrl I  
SOH  
01  
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
07  
08  
09  
0A  
0B  
0C  
0D  
0E  
0F  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
1A  
1B  
1C  
1D  
1E  
1F  
!
33  
34  
35  
36  
37  
38  
39  
40  
41  
42  
43  
44  
45  
46  
47  
48  
49  
50  
51  
52  
53  
54  
55  
56  
57  
58  
59  
60  
61  
62  
63  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
2A  
2B  
2C  
2D  
2E  
2F  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
37  
38  
39  
3A  
3B  
3C  
3D  
3E  
3F  
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
65  
66  
67  
68  
69  
70  
71  
72  
73  
74  
75  
76  
77  
78  
79  
80  
81  
82  
83  
84  
85  
86  
87  
88  
89  
90  
91  
92  
93  
94  
95  
41  
42  
43  
44  
45  
46  
47  
48  
49  
4A  
4B  
4C  
4D  
4E  
4F  
50  
51  
52  
53  
54  
55  
56  
57  
58  
59  
5A  
5B  
5C  
5D  
5E  
5F  
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
61  
62  
63  
64  
65  
66  
67  
68  
69  
6A  
6B  
6C  
6D  
6E  
6F  
70  
71  
72  
73  
74  
75  
76  
77  
78  
79  
7A  
7B  
7C  
7D  
7E  
7F  
STX  
EXT  
EOT  
ENQ  
ACK  
BEL  
BS  
#
$
100  
101  
102  
103  
104  
105  
106  
107  
108  
109  
110  
111  
112  
113  
114  
115  
116  
117  
118  
119  
120  
121  
122  
123  
124  
125  
126  
127  
%
&
Ô
(
HT  
)
Ctrl J  
LF  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
*
+
,
J
j
k
l
Ctrl K  
Ctrl L  
VT  
FF  
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
Ctrl M CR  
-
.
/
m
n
o
p
q
r
Ctrl N  
Ctrl O  
Ctrl P  
Ctrl Q  
Ctrl R  
Ctrl S  
Ctrl T  
Ctrl U  
Ctrl V  
SO  
SI  
DLE  
DC1  
DC2  
DC3  
DC4  
NAK  
SYN  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
s
t
u
v
w
x
y
z
{
|
Ctrl W ETB  
Ctrl X  
Ctrl Y  
Ctrl Z  
Ctrl [  
Ctrl \  
CAN  
EM  
SUB  
ESC  
FS  
;
<
=
>
?
\
]
^
_
Ctrl ]  
Ctrl ^  
Ctrl _  
GS  
RS  
US  
}
~
E-Class DPL Programmer’s Manual  
71  
Appendix A  
ASCII Control Chart (continued)  
Char  
Dec  
128  
Hex  
80  
Char  
Dec  
160  
Hex  
A0  
Char  
Dec  
192  
Hex  
C0  
Char  
Dec  
224  
Hex  
E0  
Ç
á
í
Ó
ü
é
129  
130  
131  
132  
133  
134  
135  
136  
137  
138  
139  
140  
141  
142  
143  
144  
145  
146  
147  
148  
149  
150  
151  
152  
153  
154  
155  
156  
157  
158  
159  
81  
82  
83  
84  
85  
86  
87  
88  
89  
8A  
8B  
8C  
8D  
8E  
8F  
90  
91  
92  
93  
94  
95  
96  
97  
98  
99  
9A  
9B  
9C  
9D  
9E  
9F  
161  
162  
163  
164  
165  
166  
167  
168  
169  
170  
171  
172  
173  
174  
175  
176  
177  
178  
179  
180  
181  
182  
183  
184  
185  
186  
187  
188  
189  
190  
191  
A1  
A2  
A3  
A4  
A5  
A6  
A7  
A8  
A9  
AA  
AB  
AC  
AD  
AE  
AF  
B0  
B1  
B2  
B3  
B4  
B5  
B6  
B7  
B8  
B9  
BA  
BB  
BC  
BD  
BE  
BF  
193  
194  
195  
196  
197  
198  
199  
200  
201  
202  
203  
204  
205  
206  
207  
208  
209  
210  
211  
212  
213  
214  
215  
216  
217  
218  
219  
220  
221  
222  
223  
C1  
C2  
C3  
C4  
C5  
C6  
C7  
C8  
C9  
CA  
CB  
CC  
CD  
CE  
CF  
D0  
D1  
D2  
D3  
D4  
D5  
D6  
D7  
D8  
D9  
DA  
DB  
DC  
DD  
DE  
DF  
ß
225  
226  
227  
228  
229  
230  
231  
232  
233  
234  
235  
236  
237  
238  
239  
240  
241  
242  
243  
244  
245  
246  
247  
248  
249  
250  
251  
252  
253  
254  
255  
E1  
E2  
E3  
E4  
E5  
E6  
E7  
E8  
E9  
EA  
EB  
EC  
ED  
EE  
EF  
F0  
F1  
F2  
F3  
F4  
F5  
F6  
F7  
F8  
F9  
FA  
FB  
FC  
FD  
FE  
FF  
ó
ú
ñ
Ô
Ò
õ
â
ä
à
Ñ
ª
Õ
µ
þ
å
ã
ç
°
Ã
ê
¿
Þ
ë
®
Ú
Û
Ù
ý
è
ï
1/2  
î
1/4  
¡
ì
Ý
Ä
Å
É
æ
Æ
ô
ö
ò
û
ù
ÿ
Ö
Ü
ø
£
Ø
x
ƒ
¯
ð
Ð
Ê
Ë
È
±
²
³
3/4  
´
Á
Â
À
©
¹
Í
Î
Ï
÷
¸
º
¨
·
»
¢
¥
Ì
Notes: (1) For hardware handshake XON/XOFF commands:  
XON Ctrl Q (DC1)  
XOFF = Ctrl S (DC3)  
=
(2) The Euro character has been added to the table above at 255 (FF) as a Datamax  
standard for internal bit-mapped fonts 0,1,2,3,4,5,6, and 9 (CG Triumvirate).  
72  
E-Class DPL Programmer’s Manual  
Appendix B  
Sample Programs  
Basic Language Program  
The following sample Basic program is included for reference. Values are assigned to the variables in  
the main section and sent to the printer in the section titled ‘Send Data’. The sample below shows the  
output generated by this program.  
START:  
OPEN “COM1:9600,N,8,1,FOR RANDOM” AS #1  
MAIN:  
CLS  
PRINT “DMX Printer Test Program (press any key)”  
WHILE I$= ““  
I$=INKEY$  
WEND  
desc$=“10K OHM 1/4 WATT”  
pcs=590  
SENDDATA:  
CR$ = CHR$(13)  
PRINT #1, CHR$(2);”L”; CR$;  
PRINT #1”,H07”;CR$;  
‘set burn time to 7  
PRINT #1”,D11”;CR$;  
‘set for 300 DPI  
PRINT #1”,191100801000025”;desc$;CR$;  
‘send description line  
PRINT #1”,1a6210000000050”;pcs; CR$;  
‘send barcode  
PRINT #1”,E”;CR$;  
‘ end of format and print  
GOTO MAIN  
10K OHM 1/4 WATT  
Figure B-1: Sample Label  
E-Class DPL Programmer’s Manual  
73  
Appendix B  
‘C’ Language Program  
The following sample ‘C’ program is included for reference. Figure B-1 shows the output generated  
by this program.  
/DMX SERIES Sample C program /  
# include <stdio.h>  
main ()  
{
char pcs = “590”;  
char desc = “10K OHM 1/4 WATT”;  
fputs (“DMX Printer Test Program\n”, stdout);  
fputs (“\x02L\n”, stdaux);  
fputs (“H07\n” stdaux);  
fputs (“D11\n”, stdaux);  
/STX L – Enter Label Formatting /  
/Enter Heat Setting of 7/  
/Set Width and Height Dot Size /  
fprintf (stdaux, “191108010000025%s\n”,desc);  
/Select smooth Font /  
fprintf (stdaux, “1a6210000000050%sPCS\n”, pcs); /Select Barcode type ‘a’  
fputs (“E\n”, stdaux);  
/
/End Label format mode and print/  
}
ASCII text file  
This ASCII text file will also generate the label shown in Figure B-1.  
^BL  
H07  
D11  
19110080100002510K OHM 1/4 WATT<CR>  
1a6210000000050590PCS<CR>  
E<CR>  
74  
E-Class DPL Programmer’s Manual  
Appendix B  
VB Application Generating DPL  
The following sample is a Visual Basic program that displays a database record on the screen. A  
user can scroll through the records and then print a selected one. Five barcodes are printed along  
with data fields and headings.  
‘Printer DPL Controls  
Dim CharSet As String  
Const StartLabel = “L”  
Const EndLabel = “E”  
‘<STX> byte  
Const PrintDensity = “D11”  
‘Printer DPL Data to position dynamic information on label  
Const OrderTxt = “191100704150010”  
Const OrderBC = “1a6205004200120”  
Const CustomerTxt = “191100603600010”  
‘font 9, 24 pt  
Const Item1NO = “191100403250010”  
Const Item1BC = “1a6204002870010”  
Const Item1Txt = “191100402690010”  
Const Item1Qty = “191100603070260”  
‘DPL Fixed Items on label  
Const Itm1 = “191100303400010Item #”  
Const Qty1 = “191100303400250Quantity”  
Const Boxsize = “B065035002002”  
Const BoxPos1 = “1X1100003050240”  
Const Image1 = “1Y3300004750010SLANT1”  
Dim Fixed As String  
‘Item Variables  
Dim Item1 As String  
Dim PrintLabel As String  
Dim OrderData As String  
‘Print label by clicking print button with the mouse  
Private Sub cmdPrint_Click()  
‘Concatenate all the dynamic data fields with the constant header  
strings, terminated with <cr> Chr$(13)  
OrderData = OrderTxt & txtOrderNo.Text & Chr$(13) & OrderBC &  
txtOrderNo.Text & Chr$(13) & CustomerTxt & txtCustomer.Text  
Item1 = Item1NO & txtItem1.Text & Chr$(13) & Item1BC &  
txtItem1.Text & Chr$(13) & Item1Txt & txtItem1Desc.Text & Chr$(13)  
& Item1Qty & txtItem1Qty.Text  
‘Concatinate entire label format and send out serial port  
PrintLabel = CharSet & MaxLength & Chr$(13) & CharSet &  
StartLabel & Chr$(13) & PrintDensity & Chr$(13) & Image1 &  
Chr$(13) & OrderData & Chr$(13) & Item1 & Chr$(13) & Fixed &  
Chr$(13) & EndLabel  
Comm1.Output = PrintLabel  
End Sub  
‘Display the record form on the screen  
Private Sub Form_Load()  
E-Class DPL Programmer’s Manual  
75  
Appendix B  
Fixed = Itm1 & Chr$(13) & Chr$(13) & Qty1 & Chr$(13) & Chr$(13)  
& BoxPos1 & Boxsize & Chr$(13)  
CharSet = Chr$(126)  
MComm.PortOpen = 1  
‘Alternate <stx> character ~  
‘Open the serial port  
End Sub  
‘Exit the program by clicking Exit button with the mouse  
Private Sub cmdExit_Click()  
Comm1.PortOpen = 0  
End  
‘Close down the serial port  
End Sub  
‘Exit the program by clicking Exit button with the mouse  
Private Sub cmdExit_Click()  
Comm1.PortOpen = 0  
End  
‘Close down the serial port  
End Sub  
76  
E-Class DPL Programmer’s Manual  
Appendix B  
VB Application interfacing via Windows Driver  
Create a form similar to the one shown here.  
VERSION 5.00  
Begin VB.Form Form1  
Caption  
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
“Datamax Test Print”  
ClientHeight  
ClientLeft  
ClientTop  
ClientWidth  
LinkTopic  
MaxButton  
MinButton  
ScaleHeight  
ScaleWidth  
1065  
60  
345  
2325  
“Form1”  
0
0
‘False  
‘False  
1065  
2325  
StartUpPosition =  
Begin VB.ComboBox cmboFonts  
3
‘Windows Default  
Height  
Left  
TabIndex  
Text  
Top  
=
=
=
=
=
=
315  
90  
2
“Font List”  
45  
2130  
Width  
End  
Begin VB.CommandButton cmdExit  
Caption  
Height  
Left  
TabIndex  
Top  
Width  
=
=
=
=
=
=
“Quit”  
465  
1350  
1
495  
825  
End  
Begin VB.CommandButton cmdPrint  
Caption  
Height  
Left  
TabIndex  
Top  
Width  
=
=
=
=
=
=
“Print”  
465  
90  
0
495  
870  
End  
End  
Attribute VB_Name = “Form1”  
Attribute VB_GlobalNameSpace = False  
Attribute VB_Creatable = False  
Attribute VB_PredeclaredId = True  
Attribute VB_Exposed = False  
‘Print label by clicking print button with the mouse  
Private Sub cmdPrint_Click()  
‘font name as seen in application font list box  
‘if not found, driver will inform GDI to generate an  
‘image that will be downloaded  
Printer.FontName = cmboFonts.Text  
E-Class DPL Programmer’s Manual  
77  
Appendix B  
‘1,440 twips equals one inch  
Printer.Height = 6480  
Printer.Width = 5760  
Printer.CurrentX = 1440  
Printer.CurrentY = 2160  
Printer.Print “0123456789”  
Printer.EndDoc  
‘4.5 inches in twips  
‘4 inches in twips  
‘1 inch (column position)  
‘2 inches (row position)  
End Sub  
Private Sub Form_Load()  
Dim X As Printer  
Dim I As Integer ‘Used for the font list  
‘ search for printer queue name / driver name  
For Each X In Printers  
If X.DeviceName = “Datamax I-4206” Then ‘printer found  
‘ Set printer as system default.  
Set Printer = X  
For I = 0 To Printer.FontCount - 1 ‘ Determine number of fonts.  
cmboFonts.AddItem Printer.Fonts(I)  
‘ Put each font into list  
box.  
Next I  
Exit For  
End If  
Next  
End Sub  
‘Exit the program and shut down the serial port  
‘by clicking Exit button with the mouse  
Private Sub cmdExit_Click()  
End  
End Sub  
When the program is run, the combo box should be populated with the available fonts as shown below.  
78  
E-Class DPL Programmer’s Manual  
Appendix B  
VB Application interfacing via Windows Driver  
This is a sample Visual Basic program that checks for any printer driver attached to “LPT1:”. If one  
is installed then a DPL file can be printed via the print driver. Note that this does not have to be a  
Datamax DPL print driver. DPL is created by the application and sent to LPT1.  
To begin, a global variable called SelPrinter must be defined as a string. Then use the following  
code to create a .frm file.  
VERSION 5.00  
Object = “{F9043C88-F6F2-101A-A3C9-08002B2F49FB}#1.2#0”; “comdlg32.ocx”  
Begin VB.Form Form1  
Caption  
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
“Form1”  
1290  
ClientHeight  
ClientLeft  
ClientTop  
ClientWidth  
LinkTopic  
MaxButton  
MinButton  
ScaleHeight  
ScaleWidth  
165  
735  
3750  
“Form1”  
0
0
‘False  
‘False  
1290  
3750  
StartUpPosition =  
Begin MSComDlg.CommonDialog CommonDialog1  
3
‘Windows Default  
Left  
Top  
=
=
=
=
=
1635  
765  
847  
847  
_ExtentX  
_ExtentY  
_Version  
393216  
End  
Begin VB.CommandButton cmdClose  
Cancel  
Caption  
Height  
Left  
TabIndex  
Top  
Width  
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
-1 ‘True  
“Close”  
372  
2400  
3
735  
972  
End  
Begin VB.CommandButton cmdStoreImage  
Caption  
Default  
Height  
Left  
TabIndex  
Top  
Width  
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
“Print”  
-1 ‘True  
372  
240  
2
735  
972  
End  
Begin VB.TextBox txtFile  
Height  
Left  
TabIndex  
Top  
Width  
=
=
=
=
=
288  
120  
1
360  
3492  
End  
Begin VB.Label Label1  
Caption  
Height  
=
=
“File Name”  
255  
E-Class DPL Programmer’s Manual  
79  
Appendix B  
Left  
=
=
=
=
120  
0
135  
1455  
TabIndex  
Top  
Width  
End  
Begin VB.Menu File  
Caption  
=
“&File”  
Begin VB.Menu open  
Caption  
End  
=
“&Open”  
Begin VB.Menu exit  
Caption  
=
=
“&Exit”  
^Q  
Shortcut  
End  
End  
End  
Attribute VB_Name = “Form1”  
Attribute VB_GlobalNameSpace = False  
Attribute VB_Creatable = False  
Attribute VB_PredeclaredId = True  
Attribute VB_Exposed = False  
Option Explicit  
‘**********************************  
‘** Type Definitions:  
#If Win32 Then  
Private Type DOC_INFO_1  
pDocName As String  
pOutputFile As String  
pDatatype As String  
End Type  
#End If ‘WIN32 Types  
‘**********************************  
‘** Function Declarations:  
#If Win32 Then  
Private Declare Function OpenPrinter& Lib “winspool.drv” Alias “OpenPrinterA”  
(ByVal pPrinterName As String, phPrinter As Long, ByVal pDefault As Long) ‘  
Third param changed to long  
Private Declare Function StartDocPrinter& Lib “winspool.drv” Alias  
“StartDocPrinterA” (ByVal hPrinter As Long, ByVal Level As Long, pDocInfo As  
DOC_INFO_1)  
Private Declare Function StartPagePrinter& Lib “winspool.drv” (ByVal hPrinter  
As Long)  
Private Declare Function WritePrinter& Lib “winspool.drv” (ByVal hPrinter As  
Long, pBuf As Any, ByVal cdBuf As Long, pcWritten As Long)  
Private Declare Function EndDocPrinter& Lib “winspool.drv” (ByVal hPrinter As  
Long)  
Private Declare Function EndPagePrinter& Lib “winspool.drv” (ByVal hPrinter  
As Long)  
Private Declare Function ClosePrinter& Lib “winspool.drv” (ByVal hPrinter As  
Long)  
#End If ‘WIN32  
Dim ch As String * 1, f1 As Integer, loadfile As String  
Private Sub cmdOpenFile_Click()  
On Error GoTo ErrHandler  
‘ Set Filters  
CommonDialog1.Filter = “All Files (*.*)|*.*”  
80  
E-Class DPL Programmer’s Manual  
Appendix B  
‘Specify Default Filter  
CommonDialog1.FilterIndex = 1  
‘Display Open dialog box  
CommonDialog1.ShowOpen  
loadfile = CommonDialog1.FileName  
Label2.Caption = loadfile  
Exit Sub  
ErrHandler:  
Exit Sub  
End Sub  
Private Sub cmdStoreImage_Click()  
Dim hPrinter&  
Dim jobid&  
Dim res&  
Dim written&  
Dim printdata$  
Dim docinfo As DOC_INFO_1  
loadfile = Form1.txtFile.Text  
If loadfile = ““ Then  
MsgBox “You must Open a file to send”, vbExclamation  
Exit Sub  
End If  
‘ Open file.  
f1 = FreeFile  
Open loadfile For Binary As f1  
‘ Open printer for printing  
res& = OpenPrinter(SelPrinter, hPrinter, 0)  
If res = 0 Then  
MsgBox “Unable to open the printer”  
Exit Sub  
End If  
docinfo.pDocName = “MyDoc”  
docinfo.pOutputFile = vbNullString  
docinfo.pDatatype = vbNullString  
jobid = StartDocPrinter(hPrinter, 1, docinfo)  
Call StartPagePrinter(hPrinter)  
Call WritePrinter(hPrinter, ByVal printdata$, Len(printdata$), written)  
While Not EOF(1)  
Get #f1, , ch  
printdata$ = ch  
Call WritePrinter(hPrinter, ByVal printdata$, Len(printdata$),  
written)  
Wend  
Call EndPagePrinter(hPrinter)  
Call EndDocPrinter(hPrinter)  
Call ClosePrinter(hPrinter) ‘ Close when done  
‘ Close file  
Close #1  
MsgBox “File sent to print spooler.”, vbExclamation  
End Sub  
Private Sub cmdClose_Click()  
Unload Me  
End Sub  
E-Class DPL Programmer’s Manual  
81  
Appendix B  
Private Sub exit_Click()  
End  
End Sub  
Private Sub Form_Load()  
Dim X As Printer  
‘ search for printer queue name / driver name  
For Each X In Printers  
If X.Port = “LPT1:” Then ‘printer found  
‘ Set printer as system default.  
SelPrinter = X.DeviceName  
Exit For  
End If  
Next  
End Sub  
Private Sub lpt2_Click()  
End Sub  
Private Sub open_Click()  
CommonDialog1.ShowOpen  
loadfile = CommonDialog1.FileName  
txtFile.Text = loadfile  
End Sub  
Private Sub Printer_Click()  
CommonDialog1.ShowPrinter  
End Sub  
This will create the form pictured below.  
Note: It may be necessary to remove and reinsert the common dialog control due to Windows®  
registry issues.  
82  
E-Class DPL Programmer’s Manual  
Appendix C  
Available Font Sizes, Referencing and Samples  
All character bit-mapped fonts available on the printers are described in this section. Each font has a  
name (Font ID) associated with it for use in programming. Use the Font Number (in the left column of  
Table C-1) in field b of the Format Record header to cause the printer to use the corresponding font.  
Fonts 0 through 8 use the slash zero (Ø) conventions for distinguishing between the zero and the  
alphabetic O. The slash can be removed with the label-formatting command Z. These fonts are non-  
proportional (monospaced). Therefore, all of the characters take up the same amount of space when  
printed. This is helpful when using variable data in a fixed area. The sizes of these fonts are shown on the  
following pages.  
The CG Triumvirate font number 9 is a proportional font. Each character will take up a different amount  
of space when printed. For example, the letter W will be wider than the letter I.  
Font  
Number  
Use with Record  
Structure Type  
Valid ASCII Characters (decimal)  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
32-127  
32-168, 171, 172, 225  
32-168, 171, 172, 225  
32, 35-38, 40-58, 65-90, 128, 142-144, 146, 153, 154, 156, 157, 165, 168, 225  
32, 35-38, 40-58, 65-90, 128, 142-144, 146, 153, 154, 156, 157, 165, 168, 225  
32, 35-38, 40-58, 65-90, 128, 142-144, 146, 153, 154, 156, 157, 165, 168, 225  
32, 35-38, 40-58, 65-90, 128, 142-144, 146, 153, 154, 156, 157, 165, 168, 225  
32-126  
Internal  
Bit-Mapped  
Fonts  
32, 48-57, 60, 62, 67, 69, 78, 83, 84, 88, 90  
32-126, 128-169, 171-173, 181-184, 189, 190, 198, 199, 208-216, 222, 224-  
237, 241, 243, 246-250  
Smooth Font  
Scalable Font  
9
Dependent upon selected symbol set; see Appendix H.  
Table C-1: Valid Human-Readable Font (Internal) ASCII Characters  
Font sizes are dependent upon the printhead resolution of the printer used; Tables C-2 and C-3 list the  
font sizes by resolution with dimensions given in dots.  
Font  
Height  
7
13  
18  
27  
36  
52  
64  
32  
Width  
5
Spacing  
Point Size  
2.5  
Font 0  
Font 1  
Font 2  
Font 3  
Font 4  
Font 5  
Font 6  
Font 7  
Font 8  
1
2
2
2
3
3
4
5
5
7
4.6  
6.4  
9.6  
12.8  
18.4  
22.7  
11.3  
9.9  
10  
14  
18  
18  
32  
15  
15  
28  
Table C-2: Font Sizes - 203 DPI Resolution  
E-Class DPL Programmer’s Manual  
83  
Appendix C  
Font  
Height  
10  
19  
27  
40  
53  
77  
95  
47  
Width  
7
10  
15  
21  
27  
27  
47  
22  
Spacing  
Point Size  
2.4  
Font 0  
Font 1  
Font 2  
Font 3  
Font 4  
Font 5  
Font 6  
Font 7  
Font 8  
1
3
3
3
4
4
6
7
7
4.6  
6.5  
9.6  
12.7  
18.5  
22.8  
11.3  
9.8  
41  
22  
Table C-3: Font Sizes - 300 DPI Resolution  
Internal Smooth Font 9 (Smooth Font) Point Size Specifiers  
Label format records with font code 9 (in Format Record header field b) can specify any of the font sizes  
in the leftmost column of the table below. The corresponding specification in either column labeled Ann  
or 0nn is used in the font size/selection (eee height) field to select the desired font size. Optional font sets  
may contain subsets of those described here. For an optional font set that generates these fonts via  
scalable font technology, the character mapping for this font is the selected scalable symbol set (see  
Appendix E).  
In the sample format below, a 300 DPI printer will use 4-point smooth font to produce a printed label  
with the words “four point font”. Sample format:  
<STX>L<CR>  
1911A0400100010four point font<CR>  
E<CR>  
Smooth Font 9 Font Size Specification Syntax  
Ann  
Point Size  
0nn  
E4203 / E4204 [3]  
E4304[4]  
4
5
6
8
10  
12  
14  
18  
24  
30  
36  
48  
72  
-
-
A04  
A05  
A06  
A08  
A10  
A12  
A14  
A18  
A24  
A30  
A36  
A48  
A72  
-
-
A06  
A08  
A10  
A12  
A14  
A18  
A24  
A30  
A36  
A48  
-
001  
002  
003  
004  
005  
006  
007  
008  
009  
010  
-
3All fonts greater than A36 are created from multiples of smaller fonts, 2x or 3x, as available.  
4All fonts greater than A24 are created from multiples of smaller fonts, 2x or 3x, as available.  
Table C-4: Internal Bit-Mapped (Smooth Font) 9 Size Chart  
84  
E-Class DPL Programmer’s Manual  
Appendix C  
Internal Bit-Mapped and Smooth Font Samples  
The identifying number is used in the Format Record header field b to cause the printer to use the  
corresponding font.  
0: Identifies a 96-character alphanumeric font, uppercase and lowercase.  
1: Identifies a 145-character uppercase and lowercase alphanumeric font that includes desenders  
and ascenders.  
2: Identifies a 138-character alphanumeric upper and lowercase font.  
3: Identifies a 62-character alphanumeric uppercase font.  
4: Identifies a 62-character alphanumeric uppercase font.  
E-Class DPL Programmer’s Manual  
85  
Appendix C  
5: Identifies a 62-character alphanumeric upper case font.  
6: Identifies a 62-character alphanumeric uppercase font.  
7: Identifies a font that prints OCR-A, size I.  
8: Identifies a font that prints OCR-B, size III.  
86  
E-Class DPL Programmer’s Manual  
Appendix C  
9: Identifies the Internal CG Triumvirate font. Point sizes are selected by the number in the  
Format Record header eee height field, see Table C-4.  
E-Class DPL Programmer’s Manual  
87  
Appendix C  
88  
E-Class DPL Programmer’s Manual  
Appendix D  
Error Codes  
The most common transmitted error codes are:  
Lowercase “c”  
The printer received a data byte from the host computer that contained a framing error (corrupted  
data - usually due to noise).  
Uppercase “I”  
An invalid command sequence was sent to the printer. The printer did not understand the command  
sequence and terminated the command interpreter.  
Uppercase “R”  
This code is sent every time the printer is turned ‘On’, signaling a hardware reset.  
Uppercase “T”  
This code signals a software reset. A software reset is made by sending the command sequence to the  
printer or by performing a reset using the front panel buttons.  
Lowercase “v”  
There is an input buffer overflow situation, caused when an overflow of data is sent to the printer.  
E-Class DPL Programmer’s Manual  
89  
Appendix D  
90  
E-Class DPL Programmer’s Manual  
Appendix E  
Single-Byte Symbol Sets  
The following tables include some of the standard symbol sets. Not all of these symbol sets can be used  
with every font. Symbol sets containing the Euro currency character are W1, WE, WG, WL, WR, and  
WT; see Appendix I, and the <STX>y command.  
Note: The following sets were produced using a Windows -based PC-compatible with an English  
(United States) keyboard properties layout. Results may vary if printing this document using a  
different input locale.  
(DN) ISO 60: Danish / Norwegian Symbol Set  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
00  
10  
20  
30  
40  
50  
60  
70  
!
2
B
R
b
r
#
3
C
S
c
$
4
D
T
d
t
%
5
E
U
e
&
6
F
V
f
7
G
W
g
(
)
9
I
Y
i
*
:
J
Z
j
+
;
K
Æ
k
,
<
L
Ø
l
-
=
M
Å
m
å
.
/
0
@
P
1
A
Q
a
q
8
H
X
h
x
>
N
^
n
¯
?
O
_
o
p
s
u
v
w
y
z
æ
ø
(DT) DeskTop Symbol Set  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
00  
10  
20  
30  
40  
50  
60  
70  
80  
90  
A0  
B0  
C0  
D0  
E0  
F0  
!
2
B
R
b
r
#
3
C
S
c
$
4
D
T
d
t
%
5
E
U
e
&
6
F
V
f
7
G
W
g
(
)
9
I
Y
i
*
:
J
Z
j
+
;
K
[
k
{
,
<
L
\
l
|
-
=
M
]
m
}
.
/
?
O
-
o
0
@
P
1
A
Q
a
q
8
H
X
h
x
>
N
^
n
~
p
s
u
v
w
y
z
±
)
º
§
µ
×
«
æ
ˆ
°
ð
˜
©
®
o
¢
fi  
¬
fl  
¦
(
ª
þ
=
¾
Pt  
t
·
¼
½
¿
t
¹
²
£
Œ
,
³
/
¤
Ø
'
÷
»
Æ
¨
Ð
ˇ
ij  
˘
¡
IJ  
¥
ø
˛
ƒ
þ
l
ß
Þ
œ
¯
°
E-Class DPL Programmer’s Manual  
91  
Appendix E  
(E1) ISO 8859/1 Latin 1 Symbol Set  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
00  
10  
20  
30  
40  
50  
60  
70  
80  
90  
A0  
B0  
C0  
D0  
E0  
F0  
!
2
B
R
b
r
#
3
C
S
c
$
4
D
T
d
t
%
5
E
U
e
&
6
F
V
f
7
G
W
g
(
)
9
I
Y
i
*
:
J
Z
j
+
;
K
[
k
{
,
<
L
\
l
|
-
=
M
]
m
}
.
/
?
O
-
o
0
@
P
1
A
Q
a
q
8
H
X
h
x
>
N
^
n
~
p
s
u
v
w
y
z
¡
¢
²
Â
Ò
â
ò
£
³
Ã
Ó
ã
ó
¤
´
Ä
Ô
ä
ô
¥
µ
Å
Õ
å
¦
Æ
Ö
æ
ö
§
·
Ç
×
ç
¨
¸
È
Ø
è
©
¸
É
Ù
é
ª
¹
Ê
Ú
ê
ú
«
»
Ë
Û
ë
û
¬
¼
Ì
Ü
ì
-
½
Í
Ý
í
®
¾
Î
Þ
î
¯
¿
Ï
ß
ï
°
À
Ð
à
±
Á
Ñ
á
ñ
ð
õ
÷
ø
ù
ü
ý
þ
ÿ
(E2) ISO 8859/2 Latin 2 Set  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
00  
10  
20  
30  
40  
50  
60  
70  
80  
90  
A0  
!
2
B
R
b
r
#
3
C
S
c
$
4
D
T
d
t
%
5
E
U
e
&
6
F
V
f
7
G
W
g
(
)
9
I
Y
i
*
:
J
Z
j
+
;
K
[
k
{
,
<
L
\
l
|
-
=
M
]
m
}
.
/
?
O
-
o
0
@
P
1
A
Q
a
q
8
H
X
h
x
>
N
^
n
~
p
s
u
v
w
y
z
˘
¤
´
§
·
¨
¸
Š
š
·
Z
z
Î
°
¹
Ł
ł
B0  
º
C0  
D0  
E0  
F0  
Á
á
Â
â
Ä
Ô
ä
Ç
×
ç
É
Ë
ë
Í
Ý
í
Ð
Ó
ó
Ö
ö
Ø
Ú
ú
Ü
ü
ß
é
î
ô
÷
ý
(E5) ISO 8859/5 Latin 5 Set  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
00  
10  
20  
30  
40  
50  
60  
70  
80  
90  
A0  
B0  
C0  
D0  
E0  
F0  
!
2
B
R
b
r
#
3
C
S
c
$
4
D
T
d
t
%
5
E
U
e
&
6
F
V
f
7
G
W
g
(
)
9
I
Y
i
*
:
J
Z
j
+
;
K
[
k
{
,
<
L
\
l
|
-
=
M
]
m
}
.
/
?
O
-
o
0
@
P
1
A
Q
a
q
8
H
X
h
x
>
N
^
n
~
p
s
u
v
w
y
z
¡
¢
²
Â
Ò
â
ò
£
³
Ã
Ó
ã
ó
¤
´
Ä
Ô
ä
ô
¥
µ
Å
Õ
å
¦
Æ
Ö
æ
ö
§
·
Ç
×
ç
¨
¸
È
Ø
è
ø
ª
º
Ê
Ú
ê
ú
«
»
Ë
Û
ë
¬
¼
Ì
Ü
ì
-
½
Í
¯
¿
Ï
ß
ï
¹
É
Ù
é
ù
¾
Î
º
À
±
Á
Ñ
á
ñ
à
í
I
î
õ
÷
û
ü
ÿ
92  
E-Class DPL Programmer’s Manual  
Appendix E  
(FR) ISO 69: French Symbol Set  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
00  
10  
20  
30  
40  
50  
60  
70  
!
2
B
R
b
r
£
3
C
S
c
$
4
D
T
d
t
%
5
E
U
e
&
6
F
V
f
7
G
W
g
(
)
9
I
Y
i
*
:
J
Z
j
+
;
K
º
k
é
,
-
=
M
§
m
è
.
>
N
^
n
¨
/
0
à
P
µ
p
1
A
Q
a
q
8
H
X
h
x
<
L
ç
l
?
O
_
o
s
u
v
w
y
z
ù
(GR) ISO 21: German Symbol Set  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
/
?
O
_
00  
10  
20  
30  
40  
50  
60  
70  
!
2
B
R
b
r
#
3
C
S
c
$
4
D
T
d
t
%
5
E
U
e
&
6
F
V
f
(
)
9
I
Y
i
*
:
J
Z
j
+
;
K
Ä
k
ä
-
=
M
Ü
m
ü
.
̓
̗
0
§
P
1
A
Q
a
q
7
8
H
X
h
x
<
L
Ö
l
>
N
^
n
ß
G
W
g
o
p
s
u
v
w
y
z
ö
(IT) ISO 15: Italian Symbol Set  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
00  
10  
20  
30  
40  
50  
60  
70  
!
2
B
R
b
r
£
3
C
S
c
$
4
D
T
d
t
%
5
E
U
e
&
6
F
V
f
7
G
W
g
(
)
9
I
Y
i
*
:
J
Z
j
+
;
K
º
k
à
,
-
=
M
é
m
è
.
>
N
^
n
ì
/
0
§
P
ù
p
1
A
Q
a
q
8
H
X
h
x
<
L
ç
l
?
O
_
o
s
u
v
w
y
z
ò
(LG) Legal Symbol Set  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
00  
10  
20  
30  
40  
50  
60  
70  
!
2
B
R
b
r
#
3
C
S
c
$
4
D
T
d
t
%
5
E
U
e
&
6
F
V
f
7
G
W
g
(
)
9
I
Y
i
*
:
J
Z
j
+
;
K
[
k
§
,
=
L
l
-
=
M
]
m
.
/
0
@
P
°
1
A
Q
a
q
8
H
X
h
x
?
O
_
o
¢
N
n
p
s
u
v
w
y
z
E-Class DPL Programmer’s Manual  
93  
Appendix E  
(MC) Macintosh Symbol Set  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
00  
10  
20  
30  
40  
50  
60  
70  
80  
90  
A0  
B0  
C0  
D0  
!
1
A
Q
a
q
Å
ë
º
2
B
R
b
r
#
3
C
S
c
s
É
ì
$
4
D
T
d
t
Ñ
î
§
%
5
E
U
e
u
Ö
ï
&
6
F
V
f
7
G
W
g
w
á
ó
(
8
H
X
h
x
à
ò
®
»
ÿ
)
9
I
Y
i
y
â
ô
©
π
*
:
J
Z
j
z
ä
ö
+
;
K
[
k
{
ã
õ
´
,
<
L
\
l
|
å
ú
¨
-
=
M
]
m
}
ç
ù
.
>
N
^
n
~
é
/
0
@
P
`
p
Ä
ê
?
O
_
o
v
Ç
í
Ü
ñ
è
ü
Ø
Ø
û
Æ
æ
£
µ
ß
Σ
¢
ª
°
±
¡
¥
÷
¿
f
Ã
¬
«
Ÿ
À
¤
Î
Õ
>
Œ
fi  
œ
fl  
/
<
Á
˜
E0  
F0  
`
Ò
Ú
Û
Ù
Â
Ê
ˆ
Ë
¯
È
Í
˙
Ï
¸
Ì
¨
Ó
˛
Ô
ˇ
º
˘
(PC) PC-8 Code Page 437 Symbol Set  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
00  
10  
-
!!  
§
(
8
H
X
h
x
*
:
J
Z
j
+
;
K
[
k
{
20  
30  
40  
50  
60  
70  
!
1
A
Q
a
2
B
R
b
r
#
3
C
S
c
$
4
D
T
d
t
%
5
E
U
e
&
6
F
V
f
7
G
W
g
)
9
I
Y
i
,
<
L
\
l
|
-
=
M
]
m
}
.
/
0
@
P
`
>
N
^
n
~
?
O
_
o
p
q
s
u
v
w
y
z
Å
ƒ
80  
90  
Ç
É
á
ü
æ
í
é
Æ
ó
â
ô
ú
ä
ö
ñ
à
ò
Ñ
σ
å
û
ª
µ
ç
ù
°
Τ
ê
ÿ
¿
ф
ë
Ö
Θ
è
Ü
¬
ï
¢
½
î
£
¼
ì
¥
¡
Ä
Pt  
«
A0  
B0  
C0  
D0  
E0  
F0  
»
a
ß
π
ф
2
δ
є
n
±
÷
(PD) PC-8 D/N, Code Page 437N Symbol Set  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
00  
10  
!!  
§
(
8
H
X
h
x
*
:
J
Z
j
+
;
K
[
k
{
20  
30  
40  
50  
60  
70  
!
2
B
R
b
r
#
3
C
S
c
$
4
D
T
d
t
%
5
E
U
e
&
6
F
V
f
7
G
W
g
)
9
I
Y
i
,
<
L
\
l
|
-
=
M
]
m
}
.
/
0
@
P
`
1
A
Q
a
q
>
N
^
n
~
?
O
_
o
p
s
u
v
w
y
z
Å
ŀ
80  
90  
Ç
É
á
ü
æ
í
é
Æ
ó
â
ô
ú
ä
ö
ñ
à
ò
Ñ
σ
å
û
õ
µ
ç
ù
Õ
Τ
ê
ÿ
¿
ф
ë
Ö
ã
Θ
è
Ü
Ã
ï
ø
î
£
ʼn
ì
Ø
¡
Ä
Ŀ
³
A0  
B0  
C0  
D0  
E0  
F0  
¤
a
ß
±
π
ф
2
δ
є
n
÷
94  
E-Class DPL Programmer’s Manual  
Appendix E  
(PE) PC-852 Latin 2 Symbol Set  
0
1
2
3
!!  
4
5
§
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
00  
10  
(
8
H
X
h
x
*
:
J
Z
j
+
;
K
[
k
{
20  
30  
40  
50  
60  
70  
!
1
A
Q
a
2
B
R
b
r
#
3
C
S
c
$
4
D
T
d
t
%
5
E
U
e
&
6
F
V
f
7
G
W
g
)
9
I
Y
i
,
<
L
\
l
|
-
=
M
]
m
}
.
/
0
@
P
`
>
N
^
n
~
?
O
_
o
p
q
s
u
v
w
y
z
80  
90  
Ç
É
ü
é
â
ô
ä
ö
ç
ž
ë
î
Ä
×
«
ł
Ö
Ü
Ł
A0  
B0  
C0  
D0  
E0  
F0  
á
í
ó
ú
Ž
Â
»
¤
´
Á
Ú
¨
ð
Ó
Ð
ß
Ë
Í
Š
÷
Î
š
̧
Ô
ͅ
ý
Ý
§
°
´
̌
˘
(PI) PI Font Symbol Set  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
00  
10  
20  
30  
40  
f
>
«
§
»
¯
˘
̌
̇
<
::  
h
50  
60  
┃┃  
U
I
70  
(PM) PC-850 Multilingual Symbol Set  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
00  
10  
20  
30  
40  
50  
60  
70  
§
(
8
H
X
h
x
)
9
I
Y
i
y
*
:
J
Z
j
+
;
K
[
·
>
N
^
/
?
O
_
o
!!  
#
3
C
S
c
&
6
F
V
f
!
1
A
Q
a
q
$
4
D
T
d
t
%
5
E
U
e
7
G
W
g
<
L
\
l
|
¨
=
M
]
m
}
2
B
R
b
r
0
@
P
`
k
{
n
~
p
s
u
v
w
z
Å
ƒ
80  
90  
Ç
É
á
ü
æ
í
é
Æ
ó
â
ô
ú
ä
ö
ñ
à
ò
å
û
ª
Â
ã
ĺ
µ
÷
ç
ù
°
ê
ÿ
¿
ë
Ö
è
Ü
ï
ø
î
£
¼
ì
Ø
¡
Ä
×
A0  
B0  
C0  
D0  
E0  
F0  
Ñ
Á
ı
½
Ú
¹
«
¥
»
Ù
Û
À
Ã
©
Î
Þ
º
ý
¢
Ý
²
¤
ð
Ó
-
Ð
ß
Ê
Ô
=
Ë
Ò
¾
È
õ
Ì
´
Õ
§
þ
¸
¯
³
±
.
E-Class DPL Programmer’s Manual  
95  
Appendix E  
(PT) PC-8 TK, Code Page 437T Symbol Set*  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
00  
(
10  
20  
30  
40  
50  
60  
70  
$
4
D
T
d
t
§
%
5
E
U
e
&
6
F
V
f
)
9
I
Y
i
y
*
:
J
Z
j
+
;
K
[
·
>
N
^
/
?
O
_
o
!!  
#
3
C
S
c
!
1
A
Q
a
7
G
W
g
<
L
\
l
|
-
=
M
]
m
}
2
B
R
b
r
0
@
P
`
8
H
X
h
k
{
n
~
p
q
s
u
v
w
x
z
Å
ƒ
80  
90  
Ç
É
á
ü
æ
í
é
Æ
ó
â
ô
ú
ä
ö
ñ
à
ò
å
û
ª
µ
÷
ç
ù
°
Τ
ê
ÿ
ф
ë
Ö
¬
Θ
è
Ü
½
ï
¢
¼
î
£
¡
ì
¥
¡
Ä
Pt  
«
A0  
B0  
C0  
D0  
E0  
F0  
Ñ
σ
»
a
ß
±
π
δ
ф
є
n
2
* Default Symbol Set  
(R8) Roman-8 Symbol Set  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
00  
10  
20  
30  
40  
50  
60  
70  
80  
90  
A0  
B0  
C0  
D0  
E0  
F0  
!
1
A
Q
a
2
B
R
b
r
#
3
C
S
c
$
4
D
T
d
t
%
5
E
U
e
&
6
F
V
f
7
G
W
g
(
)
9
I
Y
i
*
:
J
Z
j
+
;
K
[
k
{
,
<
L
\
l
|
-
=
M
]
m
}
.
/
?
O
-
o
0
@
P
8
H
X
h
x
>
N
^
n
~
p
q
s
u
v
w
y
z
À
Ý
ê
î
Ã
þ
Â
ý
ô
Ø
ã
·
È
º
û
Æ
Ð
µ
Ê
Ç
á
å
ð
Ë
ç
é
Í
Í
¾
Î
Ñ
ó
ø
Ì
Ï
ñ
ú
æ
Ó
¼
΄
¡
à
Ä
Ò
½
`
¿
è
ì
Õ
ª
ˆ
¤
ò
Ö
õ
°
˜
¥
ä
É
š
Ù
§
ë
Ï
Ú
»
Û
ƒ
ö
ß
Ÿ
±
£
¢
-
£
ù
Ü
Š
«
â
Å
Á
Þ
ü
Ô
ÿ
(SP) ISO 17: Spanish Symbol Set  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
00  
10  
20  
30  
40  
50  
60  
70  
,
<
L
Ñ
l
!
2
B
R
b
r
£
3
C
S
c
$
4
D
T
d
t
%
5
E
U
e
&
6
F
V
f
´
7
G
W
g
(
)
9
I
Y
i
*
:
J
Z
j
+
;
K
¡
k
º
-
=
M
¿
m
ç
.
/
?
O
_
o
0
§
P
`
1
A
Q
a
q
8
H
X
h
x
>
N
^
n
~
p
s
u
v
w
y
z
ñ
96  
E-Class DPL Programmer’s Manual  
Appendix E  
(SW) ISO 11: Swedish Symbol Set  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
00  
10  
20  
30  
40  
50  
60  
70  
!
1
A
Q
a
2
B
R
b
r
#
3
C
S
c
¤
4
D
T
d
t
%
5
E
U
e
&
6
F
V
f
7
G
W
g
(
)
9
I
Y
i
*
:
J
Z
j
+
;
K
Ä
k
,
<
L
Ö
l
-
=
M
Å
m
å
.
/
?
O
_
o
0
É
P
é
8
H
X
h
x
>
N
Ü
n
ü
p
q
s
u
v
w
y
z
ä
ö
(TS) PS Text Symbol Set  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
00  
10  
20  
30  
40  
50  
60  
70  
80  
90  
A0  
B0  
C0  
D0  
E0  
!
1
A
Q
a
2
B
R
b
r
#
3
C
S
c
$
4
D
T
d
t
%
5
E
U
e
&
6
F
V
f
7
G
W
g
(
)
9
I
Y
i
*
:
J
Z
j
+
;
K
[
k
{
,
<
L
\
l
|
-
=
M
]
m
}
.
/
0
@
P
`
8
H
X
h
x
>
N
^
n
~
?
O
_
o
p
q
s
u
v
w
y
z
¡
-
`
¢
´
£
ˆ
/
·
˜
¥
ƒ
˘
§
·
¤
,
¨
°
«
»
¸
¿
ˇ
¯
˛
Æ
æ
ª
Ø
ø
Œ
œ
º
Ł
ł
F0  
ß
(UK) ISO 4: United Kingdom Symbol Set  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
00  
10  
20  
30  
40  
50  
60  
70  
!
1
A
Q
a
2
B
R
b
r
£
3
C
S
c
$
4
D
T
d
t
%
5
E
U
e
&
6
F
V
f
7
G
W
g
(
)
9
I
Y
i
*
:
J
Z
j
+
;
K
[
k
{
,
<
L
\
l
|
-
=
M
]
m
}
.
>
N
^
n
/
0
@
P
`
8
H
X
h
x
?
O
_
o
p
q
s
u
v
w
y
z
(US) ISO 6: ASCII Symbol Set  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
00  
10  
20  
30  
40  
50  
60  
70  
!
1
A
Q
a
2
B
R
b
r
#
3
C
S
c
$
4
D
T
d
t
%
5
E
U
e
&
6
F
V
f
7
G
W
g
(
)
9
I
Y
i
*
:
J
Z
j
+
;
K
[
k
{
,
<
L
\
l
|
·
=
M
]
m
}
.
/
?
O
-
o
0
@
P
8
H
X
h
x
>
N
^
n
~
p
q
s
u
v
w
y
z
E-Class DPL Programmer’s Manual  
97  
Appendix E  
(VI) Ventura International Symbol Set  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
00  
10  
20  
30  
40  
50  
60  
70  
80  
90  
!
1
A
Q
a
2
B
R
b
r
#
3
C
S
c
$
4
D
T
d
t
%
5
E
U
e
&
6
F
V
f
7
G
W
g
(
)
9
I
Y
i
*
:
J
Z
j
+
;
K
[
k
{
,
<
L
\
l
|
-
=
M
]
m
}
.
/
0
@
P
`
8
H
X
h
x
>
N
^
n
~
?
O
_
o
p
q
s
u
v
w
y
z
£
ù
Ü
Š
«
Ú
§
ë
ï
A0  
B0  
C0  
D0  
E0  
F0  
â
Å
Á
À
ê
î
Ã
œ
Â
ô
Ø
ã
È
º
û
Ê
Ç
á
Ë
ç
é
í
Í
Î
Ñ
ó
ø
Ì
Ï
ñ
ú
æ
Ó
¤
ò
Ö
õ
º
Û
ƒ
ö
ß
Ÿ
¡
à
Ä
Ò
¿
è
ì
Õ
ª
¢
ü
Ô
ÿ
¥
ä
É
š
Æ
å
Ú
»
Œ
(VU) Ventura US Symbol Set  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
00  
10  
20  
30  
40  
50  
60  
70  
80  
90  
!
1
A
Q
a
2
B
R
b
r
#
3
C
S
c
$
4
D
T
d
t
%
5
E
U
e
&
6
F
V
f
7
G
W
g
(
)
9
I
Y
i
*
:
J
Z
j
+
;
K
[
k
{
,
<
L
\
l
|
-
=
M
]
m
}
.
/
0
@
P
8
H
X
h
x
>
N
^
n
~
?
O
_
o
p
q
s
u
v
w
y
z
A0  
B0  
C0  
D0  
E0  
F0  
¢
º
§
F
(W1) Windows 3.1 Latin 1 Symbol Set  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
00  
10  
20  
30  
40  
50  
60  
70  
80  
90  
A0  
B0  
C0  
D0  
E0  
F0  
!
1
A
Q
a
2
B
R
b
r
¢
#
3
C
S
c
s
ƒ
£
³
Ã
Ó
ã
ó
$
4
D
T
d
t
%
5
E
U
e
u
¥
µ
Å
Õ
å
&
6
F
V
f
v
¦
7
G
W
g
w
§
(
8
H
X
h
x
ˆ
˜
¨
¸
)
9
I
Y
i
*
:
J
Z
j
z
Š
š
ª
+
;
K
[
k
{
,
<
L
\
l
|
Œ
œ
¬
¼
Ì
Ü
ì
ü
-
=
M
]
m
}
.
/
0
@
P
`
p
>
N
^
n
~
?
O
_
o
q
y
©
¹
É
Ù
é
ù
¡
Ÿ
¯
¿
Ï
ß
ï
¤
´
Ä
Ô
ä
ô
«
»
Ë
Û
ë
û
-
½
Í
Ý
í
®
¾
Î
Þ
î
°
À
Ð
à
±
Á
Ñ
á
ñ
²
·
º
Â
Ò
â
Æ
Ö
æ
ö
Ç
×
ç
È
Ø
è
ø
Ê
Ú
ê
ú
ð
ò
õ
÷
ý
þ
ÿ
98  
E-Class DPL Programmer’s Manual  
Appendix E  
(WE) Windows 3.1 Latin 2 Symbol Set  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
00  
10  
20  
30  
40  
50  
60  
70  
80  
90  
A0  
!
1
A
Q
a
2
B
R
b
r
˘
#
3
C
S
c
$
4
D
T
d
t
¤
%
5
E
U
e
u
&
6
F
V
f
v
¦
7
G
W
g
w
§
(
)
9
I
Y
i
y
*
:
J
Z
j
z
Š
š
+
;
K
[
k
{
,
<
L
\
l
|
-
=
M
]
m
}
.
/
0
@
P
`
p
8
H
X
h
x
>
N
^
n
~
Ž
ž
?
O
_
o
q
s
Ł
ł
«
ˇ
¨
¬
-
B0  
º
±
˛
´
µ
·
¸
»
C0  
D0  
E0  
F0  
Á
Â
Ä
Ô
ä
Ç
×
ç
É
é
Ë
Í
Ý
í
Î
î
Ð
Ó
ó
Ö
ö
Ú
ú
Ü
ü
ß
á
â
ë
ô
÷
ý
(WO) Windows 3.0 Latin 1 Symbol Set  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
00  
10  
20  
30  
40  
50  
60  
70  
80  
90  
A0  
B0  
C0  
D0  
E0  
F0  
!
1
A
Q
a
2
B
R
b
r
#
3
C
S
c
$
4
D
T
d
t
%
5
E
U
e
&
6
F
V
f
7
G
W
g
(
)
9
I
Y
i
*
:
J
Z
j
+
;
K
[
k
{
,
<
L
\
l
|
-
=
M
]
m
}
.
>
N
^
n
˜
/
0
@
P
`
8
H
X
h
x
?
O
_
o
p
q
s
u
v
w
y
z
`
¡
¢
£
³
Ã
Ó
ã
ó
¤
´
Ä
Ô
ä
ô
¥
µ
Å
Õ
å
¦
Æ
Ö
æ
ö
§
·
Ç
×
ç
¨
¸
È
Ø
è
ø
ª
º
Ê
Ú
ê
ú
«
»
Ë
Û
ë
û
¬
¼
Ì
Ü
ì
-
½
Í
Ý
í
¯
¿
Ï
ß
ï
¹
É
Ù
é
ù
¾
Î
Þ
î
°
À
Ð
à
±
Á
Ñ
á
ñ
²
Â
Ò
â
ð
ò
õ
÷
ü
ý
þ
ÿ
(WT) Windows 3.1 Latin 5 Symbol Set  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
00  
10  
20  
30  
40  
50  
60  
70  
80  
90  
A0  
B0  
C0  
D0  
E0  
F0  
!
1
A
Q
a
#
3
C
S
c
s
ƒ
£
³
Ã
Ó
ã
ó
$
4
D
T
d
t
%
5
E
U
e
u
¥
&
6
F
V
f
v
¦
7
G
W
g
w
§
(
8
H
X
h
x
ˆ
˜
¨
¸
)
9
I
Y
i
*
:
J
Z
j
z
Š
š
ª
+
;
K
[
k
{
<
L
\
l
|
Œ
œ
¬
¼
Ì
Ü
ì
ü
-
=
M
]
m
}
.
/
˜
2
B
R
b
r
0
@
P
`
p
>
N
^
n
~
?
O
_
o
q
y
,
©
¹
É
Ù
é
ù
¡
Ÿ
¯
¿
Ï
ß
ï
¤
´
Ä
Ô
ä
ô
«
»
Ë
Û
ë
û
-
½
Í
®
¾
Î
¢
²
Â
Ò
â
ò
°
À
±
Á
Ñ
á
ñ
µ
·
º
Å
Õ
å
Æ
Ö
æ
ö
Ç
×
ç
È
Ø
è
ø
Ê
Ú
ê
ú
à
í
l
î
õ
÷
ÿ
E-Class DPL Programmer’s Manual  
99  
Appendix E  
100  
E-Class DPL Programmer’s Manual  
Appendix F  
Bar Code Summary Data  
Barcode fonts have alpha names (left column, below). Uppercase alpha names will print barcodes with  
human-readable interpretations, if supported. Lowercase alpha names will print barcodes only. Place the  
ID in field b of the Format Record header to cause the printer to encode the data field using the associated  
barcode symbology; see Appendix G for details. See Table F-2 for default values.  
Bar Code  
ID  
Valid ASCII Characters, decimal  
value representation  
Type  
Length Checksum  
A / a  
B / b  
Code 3 of 9  
UPC-A  
Varies  
11  
No  
Yes  
32, 36, 37, 42, 43, 45-57, 65-90  
48-57 Numeric only  
Option V used in the 6th & 7th position  
48-57 Numeric only  
48-57 Numeric only  
32-127  
48-57 Numeric only.  
C / c  
D / d  
E / e  
F / f  
UPC-E  
Interleaved 2 of 5 (I 2 of 5)  
Code 128  
6
Yes  
No  
M-103  
Yes  
Varies  
Varies  
12  
EAN-13  
Option V used in the 7th & 8th position  
G / g  
H / h  
I / i  
J / j  
K / k  
EAN-8  
Health Industry Bar Code  
Codabar  
I 2 of 5 with modulo 10 checksum  
Plessey  
7
Yes  
M-43  
No  
M-10  
M-10  
48-57 Numeric only  
32, 36-39, 42, 43, 45-57, 65-90  
36, 43, 45-58, 65-68  
Varies  
Varies  
Varies  
Up to 14  
48-57 Numeric only  
48-57 Numeric only. Option + is Last  
Character for Second M-11 Checksum  
48-57 Numeric only  
L / l  
I 2 of 5 with modulo 10 checksum &  
bearer bars  
13  
M-10  
M / m  
N / n  
O / o  
p
Q / q  
R / r  
2 digit UPC addendum  
5 digit UPC addendum  
Code 93  
2
5
Yes  
Yes  
No  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
48-57 Numeric only  
48-57 Numeric only  
35-38, 42-58, 65-90, 97-122  
48-57 Numeric only  
48-57 Numeric only  
48-57 Numeric only  
Varies  
Varies  
19  
Postnet  
UCC/EAN Code 128  
UCC/EAN Code 128  
K-Mart NON EDI bar code  
UCC/EAN Code 128 Random Weight  
Telepen  
UPS MaxiCode  
UPS MaxiCode with Byte Count  
FIM  
18  
S / s  
T / t  
U
u
v
34 +  
Varies  
84  
Specified  
1
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
48-57 Numeric only  
Alphanumeric  
Alphanumeric  
Alphanumeric  
A, B, C, D  
z
Z
PDF417  
PDF417 with Byte Count  
DataMatrix  
DataMatrix with Byte Count  
QR Code – Auto format  
QR Code – Manual format  
Aztec  
Aztec with Byte Count  
TCIF Linked Barcode 3 of 9 (TLC39)  
MicroPDF417  
Varies  
Specified  
Varies  
Specified  
Varies  
Varies  
Varies  
Specified  
Varies  
Varies  
Specified  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
All  
All  
W1c  
W1C  
W1d  
W1D  
W1f  
W1F  
W1T  
W1z  
W1Z  
All 8-bit values  
All 8-bit values  
Alphanumeric  
Single-byte or Kanji double-byte  
All 8-bit values  
All 8-bit values  
Alphanumeric  
All 8-bit values  
All 8-bit values  
Yes  
Yes  
MicroPDF417 with Byte Count  
Table F-1: Bar Code Summary Data  
E-Class DPL Programmer’s Manual  
101  
Appendix F  
Bar Code Default Widths and Heights  
203 DPI Resolution  
300 DPI Resolution  
Bar Code ID  
Height (inches)  
Ratio/Module Size  
Height (inches)  
Ratio/Module Size  
A / a  
B / b  
C / c  
D / d  
E / e  
F / f  
G / g  
H / h  
I / i  
.40  
.80  
.80  
.40  
.40  
.80  
.80  
.40  
.40  
.40  
.40  
1.30  
.90  
.80  
.40  
.08  
1.40  
1.40  
1.40  
.80  
.5  
6:2  
3
3
6:2  
2
3
.40  
.80  
.80  
.40  
.40  
.80  
.80  
.40  
.40  
.40  
.40  
1.30  
.90  
.80  
.40  
.08  
1.40  
1.40  
1.40  
.80  
.5  
9:4  
4
4
9:4  
4
4
3
4
6:2  
6:3  
5:2  
6:3  
5:2  
3
3
3
N/A  
2
2
9:4  
9:4  
9:4  
9:4  
9:4  
4
4
4
N/A  
4
4
J / j  
K / k  
L / l  
M / m  
N / n  
O / o  
p
Q / q  
R / r  
S / s  
T / t  
v
2
1
1
3
1
1
Module size: Dots / inches / mm  
n/a / 1x1 / 25.4x25.4 (overall symbol)  
2x6 / .01x.03 / .22x.66  
Module size: Dots / inches / mm  
n/a / 1x1 / 25.4x25.4 (overall symbol)  
3x9 / .01x.03 / .21x.63  
U / u  
Z / z  
W1C / W1c  
W1D / W1d  
W1F / W1f  
W1T  
4x4 / .02x.02 / .44x.44  
4x4 / .02x.02 / .44x.44  
4x4 / .02x.02 / .44x.44  
2x6 / .01x.03 / .22x.66  
6x6 / .02x.02 / .42x.42  
6x6 / .02x.02 / .42x.42  
6x6 / .02x.02 / .42x.42  
3x9 / .01x.03 / .21x.63  
W1Z / W1z  
2x6 / .01x.03 / .22x.66  
3x9 / .01x.03 / .21x.63  
Table F-2: Barcode Default Data  
Note: Some barcodes will be sensitive to the label command Dwh (Set Width and Height Dot Size),  
see Label-Formatting Commands.  
102  
E-Class DPL Programmer’s Manual  
Appendix G  
Bar Code Details  
Unless noted, all barcodes shown here were produced using the ratio/module values of 00 and height  
fields of 000 to cause the printer to produce symbols using default bar widths and height fields. See  
Appendix F for a listing of the default values.  
A: Code 3 of 9  
Valid Characters: 0 – 9, A – Z - .* $ / + % and the space character.  
Variable Length.  
Valid bar dimensions: The expected ratio of wide to narrow bars can range from 2:1 to 3:1.  
The following example prints a code 3 of 9 bar code with a wide to narrow bar ratio of 3:1:  
<STX>L  
D11  
1A00000001501000123456789<CR>  
121100000000100Barcode A<CR>  
E
B: UPC-A  
Valid Characters: 0 – 9  
Length: Twelve digits. If the user provides 11 digits, the printer will compute the checksum; or, if the  
user provides the checksum, the printer verifies it against an expected checksum. When these  
checksums do not match, all zeros will be printed along with the expected checksum. See Appendix  
N.  
Valid bar dimensions: The fourth character of record is the width of the narrow bar in dots. All other  
bars are a ratio of the narrow bar (2 times, 3 times, and 4 times the narrow bar width).  
The following example prints a UPC-A bar code:  
<STX>L  
D11  
1B000000015010001234567890<CR>  
121100000000100Barcode B<CR>  
E
E-Class DPL Programmer’s Manual  
103  
Appendix G  
C: UPC-E  
Valid Characters: 0 – 9  
Length: Seven digits. If the user provides six digits, the printer will compute the checksum; or, if the  
user provides the checksum, the printer verifies it against an expected checksum. When these  
checksums do not match, all zeros will be printed along with the expected checksum.  
Valid bar dimensions: The fourth character of record is the width of the narrow bar in dots. All other  
bars are a ratio of the narrow bar (2 times, 3 times, and 4 times the narrow bar width).  
The following example prints a UPC-E bar code:  
<STX>L  
D11  
1C0000000150100012345<CR>  
121100000000100Barcode C<CR>  
E
D: Interleaved 2 of 5  
Valid Characters: 0 – 9  
Variable Length.  
Valid bar dimensions: The expected ratio of wide to narrow bars can range from 2:1 to 3:1.  
The following example prints an I 2 of 5 bar code with a wide to narrow bar ratio of 3:1:  
<STX>L  
D11  
1D000000015010001234567890<CR>  
121100000000100Barcode D<CR>  
E
E: Code 128  
Valid Characters: All ASCII characters.  
Variable Length  
Valid bar dimensions: The fourth character of record is the width of the narrow bar in dots. All other  
bars are a ratio of the narrow bar (2 times the narrow bar width, 3 times the narrow bar width, and 4  
times the narrow bar width).  
This printer supports Code 128 subsets A, B, and C. The selection can start on any code subset and  
switch to another subset within the data stream. The default subset is B; otherwise, the first character  
(A, B, C) of the data field determines the subset. Subset switching is only performed in response to  
code switch command. These commands are placed in the data to be encoded at appropriate  
locations, see Table G-1.  
Code 128 Subset A: Includes all of the standard uppercase alphanumeric keyboard characters  
plus the control and special characters. To select Code 128 Subset A, place an ASCII A (DEC  
65, HEX 41) before the data to be encoded.  
104  
E-Class DPL Programmer’s Manual  
Appendix G  
Code 128 Subset B: Includes all of the standard uppercase alphanumeric keyboard characters  
plus the lowercase alphabetic and special characters. To select Code 128 Subset B, place an  
ASCII B (DEC 66, HEX 42) before the data to be encoded. If no start character is sent for the  
128 font, Code 128 Subset B will be selected by default.  
Code 128 Subset C: Includes the set of 100 digit pairs from 00 through 99 inclusive, as well as  
special characters. Code 128 Subset C is used for double density encoding of numeric data. To  
select Code 128 Subset C, place an ASCII C (DEC 67, HEX 43) before the data to be encoded.  
Subset C can only encode an even number of numeric characters. When the data to be encoded  
includes an odd number of numeric characters, the last character causes the printer to  
automatically generate a ‘switch to subset B’ and encode the last character appropriately in  
subset B.  
Note: It is recommended that a B character be used as the first character in order to prevent  
an A or C from changing the subset.  
Special Character Handling: Characters with an ASCII value greater than 95 are considered special  
characters. To access these values, a two-character reference table is built into the printer, see table  
below. As an example, to encode FNC2 into a Code 128 Subset A bar code, send the ASCII & (DEC  
38, HEX 26) followed by an ASCII B (DEC 66, HEX 41). Code FNC2 will be encoded.  
Example: ATEST&B123 Data Encoded: TEST<FNC2>123  
ASCII  
96  
2 CHAR  
&A  
CODE A  
FNC3  
CODE B  
FNC3  
CODE C  
N/A  
97  
&B  
FNC2  
FNC2  
N/A  
98  
99  
100  
101  
102  
&C  
&D  
&E  
&F  
SHIFT  
CODEC  
CODEB  
FNC4  
SHIFT  
CODEC  
FNC4  
CODEA  
FNC1  
N/A  
N/A  
CODEB  
CODEA  
FNC1  
&G  
FNC1  
Table G-1: Special Character Handling  
Control Codes: Control character encoding into Code 128 Subset A by sending these control codes:  
`
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
NUL  
1 – 26  
ESC  
FS  
GS  
RS  
a through z  
{
|
}
~
ASCII 127  
US  
The following example prints a Code 128 bar code:  
<STX>L  
D11  
1E000000015010001234567890<CR>  
121100000000100Barcode E<CR>  
E
E-Class DPL Programmer’s Manual  
105  
Appendix G  
F: EAN-13  
Valid Characters: 0 – 9  
Length: Thirteen digits. If the user provides 12 digits, the printer will compute the checksum; or, if  
the user provides the checksum, the printer verifies it against an expected checksum. When these  
checksums do not match, all zeros will be printed along with the expected checksum. See Appendix  
Q.  
Valid bar dimensions: The fourth character of record is the width of the narrow bar in dots. All other  
bars are a ratio of the narrow bar (2 times, 3 times, and 4 times the narrow bar width).  
The following example prints an EAN-13 bar code:  
<STX>L  
D11  
1F0000000150100012345678901<CR>  
121100000000100Barcode F<CR>  
E
G: EAN-8  
Valid Characters: 0 – 9  
Length: Eight digits. If the user provides 7 digits, the printer will compute the checksum; or, if the  
user provides the checksum, the printer verifies it against an expected checksum. When these  
checksums do not match, all zeros will be printed along with the expected checksum.  
Valid bar dimensions: The fourth character of record is the width of the narrow bar in dots. All other  
bars are a ratio of the narrow bar (2 times, 3 times, and 4 times the narrow bar width).  
The following example prints an EAN-8 bar code:  
<STX>L  
D11  
1G00000001501000123456<CR>  
121100000000100Barcode G<CR>  
E
106  
E-Class DPL Programmer’s Manual  
Appendix G  
H: Health Industry Bar Code (HIBC; Code 39 bar code with a modulo 43 checksum)  
Valid Characters: 0 – 9, A – Z, -, $, /, ., %, +  
Variable Length.  
Valid bar dimensions: The expected ratio of wide to narrow bars can range from 2:1 to 3:1. The host  
must supply the leading plus character (+).  
The following example prints a HIBC bar code with a wide to narrow bar ratio of 3:1:  
<STX>L  
D11  
1H0000000150050+0123456789<CR>  
121100000000100Barcode H<CR>  
E
I: Codabar  
Valid Characters: 0 – 9, A – D - . $ : / +  
Variable Length (requiring at least three characters).  
Valid bar dimensions: The expected ratio of wide to narrow bars can range from 2:1 to 3:1. Valid  
symbols require start and stop characters (A – D). These characters should be placed in the data field  
along with the data to be included in the symbol.  
The following example prints a Codabar bar code with a wide to narrow bar ratio of 3:1:  
<STX>L  
D11  
1I63040001501000A1234567890D<CR>  
121100000000100Barcode I<CR>  
E
Barcode I  
J: Interleaved 2 of 5 with a modulo 10 checksum.  
Valid Characters: 0 – 9  
Variable Length.  
Valid bar dimensions: The expected ratio of wide to narrow bars can range from 2:1 to 3:1.  
The following example prints an I2 of 5 bar code with a modulo 10 checksum added and a wide to  
narrow bar ratio of 3:1:  
<STX>L  
D11  
1J000000015010001234567890<CR>  
121100000000100Barcode J<CR>  
E
E-Class DPL Programmer’s Manual  
107  
Appendix G  
K: Plessey  
Valid Characters: 0 – 9  
Length: One to 14 digits.  
Valid bar dimensions: The expected ratio of wide to narrow bars can range from 2:1 to 3:1. If a plus  
character (+) is the last data character, an additional MSI checksum will be added to the bar code in  
place of the plus character.  
The following example prints a Plessey bar code with a wide to narrow bar ratio of 3:1:  
<STX>L  
D11  
1K000000015010001234567890<CR>  
121100000000100Barcode K<CR>  
E
L: Interleaved 2 of 5 with a modulo 10 checksum and shipping bearer bars.  
Valid Characters: 0 – 9  
Variable Length. (For the bearer bars 14 characters are required.)  
Valid bar dimensions: The expected ratio of wide to narrow bars can range from 2:1 to 3:1.  
The following example prints an I 2 of 5 bar code with a modulo 10 checksum, a wide to narrow bar  
ratio of 3:1 and bearer bars:  
<STX>L  
D11  
1L00000001501000123456789012<CR>  
121100000000100Barcode L<CR>  
E
108  
E-Class DPL Programmer’s Manual  
Appendix G  
M: 2-digit UPC addendum  
Valid Characters: 0 – 9  
Length: Two digits.  
Valid bar dimensions: The fourth character of record is the width of the narrow bar in dots. All other  
bars are a ratio of the narrow bar (2 times, 3 times, and 4 times the narrow bar width). Human  
readable characters for this symbology are printed above the bar code symbol.  
The following example prints a 2-digit UPC bar code addendum:  
<STX>L  
D11  
1M000000015010042<CR>  
121100000000100Barcode M<CR>  
E
N: 5-digit UPC addendum  
Valid Characters: 0 – 9  
Length: Five digits.  
Valid bar dimensions: The width multiplier is the width of the narrow bar in dots. All other bars are a  
ratio of the narrow bar (2 times, 3 times, and 4 times the narrow bar width). Human readable  
characters for this symbology are printed above the bar code symbol.  
The following example prints a 5-digit UPC bar code addendum:  
<STX>L  
D11  
1N000000015010001234<CR>  
121100000000100Barcode N<CR>  
E
O: Code 93  
Valid Characters: 0 – 9, A Z - . $ / + % and the space character.  
Variable Length.  
Valid bar dimensions: The width multiplier is the width of the narrow bar in dots. All other bars are a  
ratio of the narrow bar (2 times, 3 times, and 4 times the narrow bar width).  
The following example prints a Code 93 bar code:  
<STX>L  
D11  
1O0000000150100Datamax42<CR>  
121100000000100Barcode O<CR>  
E
E-Class DPL Programmer’s Manual  
109  
Appendix G  
p: Postnet  
Valid Characters: 0 – 9  
Length: Five, 9, or 11 digits (non-numeric data-bytes are accepted but not encoded).  
Valid bar dimensions: The width and height multiplier values of 00 will produce a valid symbol. The  
bar code height field is ignored since the symbol height is U.S. Postal Service specific and is used to  
produce a zip code on a letter or package for the U.S.P.S.  
The following example prints a Postnet bar code:  
<STX>L  
D11  
1p000000015010032569<CR>  
121100000000100Barcode p<CR>  
E
Q: UCC/EAN Code 128  
Valid Characters: 0 – 9  
Length: Nineteen digits  
Valid bar dimensions: The fourth character of record is the width of the narrow bar in dots. All other  
bars are a ratio of the narrow bar (2 times, 3 times, and 4 times the narrow bar width). Human  
readable characters for this bar code symbology are printed above the bar code symbol. The printer  
spreads a weighted module 103 checksum.  
The following example prints a UCC/EAN Code 128 bar code:  
<STX>L  
D11  
1Q00000001501000123456789012345678<CR>  
121100000000100Barcode Q<CR>  
E
110  
E-Class DPL Programmer’s Manual  
Appendix G  
R: UCC/EAN Code128 K-MART NON EDI bar code.  
Valid Characters: 0 – 9  
Length: Eighteen digits.  
Valid bar dimensions: The fourth character of record is the width of the narrow bar in dots. All other  
bars are a ratio of the narrow bar (2 times, 3 times, and 4 times the narrow bar width). Human  
readable characters for this bar code symbology are printed above the bar code symbol. This bar code  
is set up according to K-MART specifications.  
The following example prints a KMART bar code.  
<STX>L  
D11  
1R0000000150100012345678901234567<CR>  
121100000000100Barcode R<CR>  
E
S: UCC/EAN Code 128 Random Weight  
Valid Characters: 0 – 9  
Length: At least thirty-four digits.  
Valid bar dimensions: The fourth character of record is the width of the narrow bar in dots. All other  
bars are a ratio of the narrow bar (2 times, 3 times, and 4 times the narrow bar width).  
This bar code is commonly used by the food and grocery industry.  
The following example prints a UCC/EAN Code 128 Random Weight bar code:  
<STX>L  
D11<CR>  
1S000000015005001100736750292601193042032020018002110123456<CR>  
121100000000100Barcode S<CR>  
E
Barcode S  
E-Class DPL Programmer’s Manual  
111  
Appendix G  
T: Telepen  
Valid Characters: All ASCII characters.  
Variable Length  
Valid bar dimensions: The fourth character of the record is the width of the narrow bar in dots. All  
other bars are a ratio of the narrow bar (2 times, 3 times, and 4 times the narrow bar width).  
The following example prints a Telepen bar code:  
<STX>L  
D11  
1T0000000150100ABCDEF<CR>  
121100000000100Barcode T<CR>  
E
Barcode T  
u / U: UPS MaxiCode (Modes 2 & 3)  
Valid Characters: All ASCII characters.  
Variable Length (u): The printer supports MaxiCode as defined in the AIM Technical Specification.  
Specified Length (U): Same as variable length; however, with a Byte Count Specifier values 0x00  
through 0xFF can be used within the data string without conflicting with the DPL format record  
terminators.  
The following examples illustrate various label format record message syntaxes for encoding  
variable length data and special formatting used to denote special ASCII characters, as shown:  
Note: Mode 2 U.S. postal codes of less than nine digits will be padded with zeros.  
Symbol:  
Hexadecimal Value:  
R
S
1E  
1D  
04  
G
S
E
E
O
T
Printer message syntax allows O to be substituted with <CR> or the  
T
use of both, EO <CR>.  
T
MaxiCode fixed field format example:  
<STX>L  
D11<CR>  
1u0000001000100327895555840611THIS PACKAGE IS GOING TO  
DATAMAXCORP<CR>  
121100000000100Barcode u<CR>  
E
Where:  
32789 5 digit ASCII, Postal Code  
5555  
840  
611  
4 digit ASCII, +4 Postal Code  
3 digit ASCII, Country Code  
3 digit ASCII, class of service  
THIS... 84 ASCII characters maximum, data string  
112  
E-Class DPL Programmer’s Manual  
Appendix G  
In the four UPS 3.0 protocol examples that follow, Primary Message control characters GS will not be  
encoded in the MaxiCode symbol. All characters, the Secondary Message, with the exception of the  
leading GS, in are encoded.  
Example 1: UPS 3.0 zip + 4 with Message data format and message header  
1u0000001200120[)>R 01G 96841706672G 840G 001G 1Z12345675G UPSNG 12345EG 0  
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
89GSGS1/1G 10.1G YG G G  
S S SUTR EOT  
S
S
S
Where:  
[)>R 01G 96  
Message Header  
S
S
841706672  
840  
Maximum 9 alphanumeric ASCII, Postal Code  
Country Code  
Class  
Primary message  
001  
G
S1Z1...  
Secondary message  
...TR E  
O
S
T
Example 2: UPS 3.0 international postal code with Message data format and message header  
1u0000001200120[)>R 01G 96V6C3E2G 068G 001G 1Z12345675G UPSNG 12345EG 089G  
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
G
S S1/1G 10.1G YG G G  
S S SUTR EOT  
S
S
S
Where:  
[)>R 01G 96  
Message Header  
S
S
V6C3E2  
068  
Maximum 6 alphanumeric ASCII, International Zip Code  
Country Code  
Class  
Primary message  
001  
G
S1Z1...  
Secondary message  
...TR E  
O
S
T
Example 3: UPS 3.0 international postal code without Message data format and message header  
1u0000001200120V6C3E2G 068G 001G 1Z12345675G UPSNG 12345EG 089GSGS1/1G 10.  
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
1G YG G G  
S S SUTR EOT  
S
S
Where:  
V6C3E2  
068  
Maximum 6 alphanumeric ASCII, International Zip Code  
Country Code  
Class  
Primary message  
001  
G
S1Z1...  
Secondary message  
...TR E  
O
S
T
Example 4: UPS 3.0 zip + 4 postal code without Message data format and message header  
1u0000001200120327073270G 068G 001G 1Z12345675G UPSNG 12345EG 089GSGS1/1G 1  
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
0.1G YG G G  
S S SUTR EOT  
S
S
Where:  
32707  
3270  
068  
5 digit ASCII, Zip Code  
4 digit ASCII, + 4 Zip Code (not required)  
Country Code  
Class  
Primary message  
001  
G
S1Z1...  
Secondary message  
...TR E  
O
S
T
E-Class DPL Programmer’s Manual  
113  
Appendix G  
Example 5: MaxiCode fixed field format with Byte Count Specifier  
The specified length example includes a byte count field for all bytes that follow until the end of the  
barcode data. The byte count is 51. The symbology encodes “327895555840666this package<CR>is  
going to Datamax”, and prints the barcode. Notice that a <CR> does not terminate the barcode  
format record. A line of text is also printed.  
<STX>L  
D11<CR>  
1U00000010001000051327895555840666this package<0x0D>is  
going to Datamax  
121100000000100Barcode U<CR>  
E
Barcode U  
v: FIM  
Valid Characters: A, B, C, or D  
Length: One character  
Valid bar dimensions: The width and height multiplier works the same as for fonts on this bar code.  
This bar code is to display the Facing Identification Mark (FIM) used on certain types of letter mail  
for the U S Postal Service:  
FIM A: Courtesy reply mail with Postnet.  
FIM B: Business reply, penalty or franked mail without Postnet.  
FIM C: Business reply, penalty or franked mail with Postnet.  
FIM D: OCR readable mail without Postnet (usually used on courtesy reply envelopes).  
The following example prints an FIM A bar code:  
<STX>L  
D11  
1v0000000150100A<CR>  
121100000000100Barcode v<CR>  
E
114  
E-Class DPL Programmer’s Manual  
Appendix G  
z / Z: PDF417  
Valid Characters: All ASCII characters.  
Variable Length (z): This two dimensional barcode holds large amounts of data in a small area, while  
providing a high level of redundancy and error checking, if specified.  
Specified Length (Z): Same as the variable length; however, with a Byte Count Specifier values 0x00  
through 0xFF can be used within the data string without conflicting with the DPL format record  
terminators.  
Record Structure: a b c d eee ffff gggg [hhhh] i j kk ll mm nn…n  
Where:  
Field  
Valid Inputs  
1,2,3 and 4  
Meaning  
a
b
Rotation  
z and Z  
Lowercase selects the PDF417 bar code, variable length.  
Uppercase selects the PDF417 bar code, with a Byte Count Specifier.  
Module size horizontal multiplier  
c
d
0
0
Module size vertical multiplier  
eee  
000  
Not Used  
ffff  
gggg  
[hhhh]  
0000 to 9999  
0000 to 9999  
0000 to 9999  
Row  
Column (see Appendix J)  
Optional string length specifier. Field termination is set by this byte  
count. This decimal value includes all of the data following this byte  
count field, but does not include itself.  
i
T = truncated, F = normal Specifies barcode type  
j
0 – 8  
Security level  
kk  
00 – 99  
Aspect ratio specified as a fraction; the first digit is the numerator and  
the second the denominator. Use 00 for the default ratio of 1:2.  
Number of rows. Use 00 for calculated best fit (values less than 3  
default to 3, values greater than default to 90).  
Number of columns (values greater than 30 default to 30).  
Data to be encoded.  
ll  
03 – 90  
mm  
nn…n  
01 – 30  
All ASCII characters.  
Sample 1: The variable length example encodes “PDF417” with a security level one, a 1:2 aspect  
ratio, best-fit rows and columns, and prints the bar code. A line of text is also printed.  
<STX>L  
D11<CR>  
1z0000000150100F1000000PDF417<CR>  
121100000000100Barcode z<CR>  
E
Barcode z  
Sample 2: The specified length example includes a byte count field for all bytes that follow until the  
end of the barcode data. The byte count is 15. The symbology encodes “pdf<CR>417”,  
and prints the barcode. Notice that a <CR> does not terminate the barcode format record.  
A line of text is also printed.  
<STX>L  
D11<CR>  
1Z00000001501000015F1000000pdf<0x0D>417  
121100000000100Barcode Z<CR>  
E
Barcode Z  
E-Class DPL Programmer’s Manual  
115  
Appendix G  
W1c / W1C: DataMatrix  
Valid Characters: Any eight-bit byte data  
Variable Length (W1c): This is a two-dimensional matrix symbology comprised of square modules  
arranged within a perimeter finder pattern. Two types are ECC 000 – 140 and ECC 200.  
Specified Length (W1C): Same as the variable length, however, with a Byte Count Specifier values  
0x00 through 0xFF can be used within the data string without conflicting with the DPL format record  
terminators.  
ECC 000 – 140 symbols: These square symbols can be any odd sizes from 9x9 to 49x49, which may  
be specified in the fields kkk and lll. If the symbol is specified with even numbers of rows or  
columns, the next largest odd value will be used. Input values greater than 49 or less than 9 will  
cause the symbol to be automatically sized for the input character stream. The record structure is  
expanded for visual clarity.  
Record Structure: a W1 b c d eee ffff gggg [hhhh] iii j kkk lll mm…m  
Where:  
Field  
a
Valid Inputs  
1,2,3, and 4  
Meaning  
Rotation  
W1  
b
W1  
c and C  
Fixed value, extended barcode set  
Lowercase selects the DataMatrix bar code, variable length  
Uppercase selects the Datamatrix barcode with a Byte Count Specifier  
Module size horizontal multiplier  
Module size vertical multiplier  
No effect; must be numeric  
c
d
1 – 9 and A – O  
1 – 9 and A – O  
000 – 999  
0000 – 9999  
0000 – 9999  
0000 to 9999  
eee  
ffff  
gggg  
[hhhh]  
Label position, row  
Label position, column (see Appendix J)  
Optional string length specifier. Field termination is set by this byte  
count. This decimal value includes all of the data following this byte  
count field, but does not include itself.  
iii  
j
000, 050, 080, 100, 140  
3-digit convolutional error correction level.  
If any number other than one of these options is entered then the nearest  
lesser value from the valid entries is used (e.g., selecting a value of 099  
will cause an actual ECC value of 080 to be used).  
Format identification, where:  
0 – 6  
0 - Automatically selects an encodation scheme based on the  
characters to be encoded.  
1 - Numeric data.  
2 - Upper case alphabetic.  
3 - Upper case alphanumeric and punctuation characters (period,  
comma, hyphen, and slash).  
4 - Upper case alphanumeric.  
5 - ASCII, the full ASCII character set.  
6 - Any 8-bit byte.  
If a format identifier is selected which will not encode the input  
character stream then the barcode symbol will not be printed. It is  
recommended that the auto-encodation format identification be used  
since it will select the best possible encoding scheme for the input  
stream.  
116  
E-Class DPL Programmer’s Manual  
Appendix G  
Field  
kkk  
Valid Inputs  
Meaning  
9,11,13…49. ECC 140 A 3 digit odd number (or 000) of rows requested. 000 causes rows to be  
minimum is 15.  
automatically determined. If the rows and columns do not match, the  
symbol will be sized to a square using the greater of the two values.  
lll  
9,11,13…49. ECC 140 A 3 digit odd number (or 000) of columns requested. 000 causes  
minimum is 15.  
columns to be automatically determined. If the rows and columns do  
not match, the symbol will be sized to a square using the greater of the  
two values.  
mm…m  
8-bit data, followed by a  
termination character.  
Data to be encoded.  
ECC 200 symbols: There are 24 square symbol sizes available, which may be specified in fields kkk  
and lll, measured in modules as indicated below. If an ECC 200 symbol is specified with odd  
numbers of rows or columns, the next largest even value will be used. Input values greater than 144  
or less than 10 will cause the symbol to be automatically sized for the input character stream. The  
record structure is expanded for visual clarity.  
Record Structure: a W1 b c d eee ffff gggg [hhhh] iii j kkk lll mm…m  
Where:  
Field  
a
Valid Inputs  
1,2,3, and 4  
Meaning  
Rotation  
W1  
b
W1  
c and C  
Fixed value, extended barcode set  
Lowercase selects the DataMatrix bar code, variable length  
Uppercase selects the Datamatrix barcode with a Byte Count Specifier  
Module size horizontal multiplier  
Module size vertical multiplier  
No Effect; Must be numeric  
c
d
1 to 9 and A to O  
1 to 9 and A to O  
000 to 999  
0000 to 9999  
0000 to 9999  
0000 to 9999  
eee  
ffff  
gggg  
[hhhh]  
Label position, row  
Label position, column (see Appendix J)  
Optional string length specifier. Field termination is set by this byte  
count. This decimal value includes all of the data following this byte  
count field, but does not include itself.  
Reed-Solomon error correction.  
iii  
j
200  
0
Fixed value, not used  
kkk  
10, 12, 14, 16, 18, 20, 22, A 3 digit even number (or 000) of rows requested. 000 causes rows to  
24, 26, 32, 36, 40, 44, 48, be automatically determined. If the rows and columns do not match, the  
52, 64, 72, 80, 88, 96, symbol will be sized to a square using the greater of the two values.  
104, 120, 132, 144  
lll  
10, 12, 14, 16, 18, 20, 22, A 3 digit even number (or 000) of columns requested. 000 causes  
24, 26, 32, 36, 40, 44, 48, columns to be automatically determined. If the rows and columns do  
52, 64, 72, 80, 88, 96, not match, the symbol will be sized to a square using the greater of the  
104, 120, 132, 144  
8-bit data, followed by a  
termination character.  
two values.  
Data to be encoded.  
mm…m  
Sample 1: The variable length example encodes “DATAMAX” using a module multiplier of 4, with  
an error correction level of 80, automatic encodation and determination of rows and  
columns, and then a prints the bar code. A line of text is also printed.  
E-Class DPL Programmer’s Manual  
117  
Appendix G  
<STX>L  
D11<CR>  
1W1c44000010001000800000000DATAMAX<CR>  
121100000000100Barcode W1c<CR>  
E
Barcode W1c  
Sample 2: The specified length example includes a byte count field for all bytes that follow until the  
end of the barcode data. The byte count is 29. The symbology encodes  
“Datamax<CR>prints best”, and prints the bar code. Notice that a <CR> does not  
terminate the barcode format record. A line of text is also printed.  
<STX>L  
D11<CR>  
1W1C440000100010000290800000000Datamax<0x0D>prints best  
121100000000100Barcode W1C<CR>  
E
Barcode W1C  
W1d / W1D: QR Code  
Valid Characters: Numeric Data, Alphanumeric Data, 8-bit byte data, and Kanji characters  
Variable Length: The two-dimensional bar code (as documented in AIM, Version 7.0).  
Record Structure: a W1 b c d eee ffff gggg hh…h  
Where:  
Field  
a
Valid Inputs  
1,2,3 and 4  
Meaning  
Rotation  
W1  
b
W1  
D and d  
Fixed value, extended barcode set  
Selects the QR bar code formatting mode, where:  
D = Manual formatting. Allows the data string (hh…h) to be entered  
according with a comma (,) as a field separator; fields are optional  
per QR Code specifications, and the first field indicates Model 1  
or Model 2 QR Code (Model 2 is the default).  
d = Automatic formatting. Allows the data string (hh…h) to be data  
only.  
c
1 to 9 and A to O  
Module size horizontal multiplier Each cell in the bar code is square,  
therefore ‘c’ and ‘d’ must be equal. Depending on the conversion mode  
(<STX>n or <STX>m), each unit indicates a cell dimension of .01 inch or  
.1 mm.  
d
1 to 9 and A to O  
000 to 999  
0000 to 9999  
Module size vertical multiplier. (See explanation for ‘c’, above.)  
No effect; must be numeric  
Label position, row  
Label position, column (see Appendix J)  
QR Code data string (see Generation Structure, below).  
eee  
ffff  
gggg  
hh…h  
0000 to 9999  
Valid ASCII character  
string, followed by (a)  
termination character(s).  
Generation Structure  
The data input structure (hh…h) is as follows:  
118  
E-Class DPL Programmer’s Manual  
Appendix G  
Auto Format (bar code W1d)  
With barcode identifier ‘d’, the data begins after the last character of the column position field,  
and does not include any command characters. The data string is terminated with a termination  
character, usually a 0x0d hex that occurs twice in succession. The bar code symbol will have the  
following characteristics:  
1. Model 2  
2. Error Correction Code Level = ‘M’ (Standard Reliability Level)  
3. Mask Selection = Automatic  
4. Data Input Mode = Automatic  
Example:  
<STX>L  
(Two  
termination  
characters  
required.)  
D11<CR>  
1W1d4400000100010This is the data portion<CR><CR>  
121100000000100Barcode W1D<CR>  
E
Manual Formatting (bar code W1D)  
With barcode identifier ‘D’, minor changes allow flexibility for data entry. (Spaces have been  
added for readability.)  
[q,] e [m] i, cdata cdata cdata…cdata term  
Where:  
Field  
Valid Inputs  
1, 2  
H, Q, M, L  
Meaning  
QR Code Model number, optional. Model 2 is the default.  
Error Correction Level:  
q
e
H
Q
M
L
=
=
=
=
Ultra Reliability Level  
High Reliability Level  
Standard Reliability Level  
High Density Level  
m
i
0 – 8, none  
A, a, M, m  
Mask Number, optional:  
None = Automatic Selection  
0-7  
8
=
=
Mask 0 to Mask 7  
No Mask  
Data Input Mode:  
A
a
M
m
=
=
=
=
Automatic setting, ASCII  
Automatic, hex-ASCII  
Manual Setting, ASCII  
manual, hex-ASCII  
cdata  
term  
N, A, B, K  
immediately  
followed by data  
Character Mode:  
N
A
B
=
=
=
Numeric, N data  
Alphanumeric, A data  
Binary , Bnnnn data (where nnnn = data byte-count, 4  
decimal digits; byte-count /2 for hex-ASCII  
Kanji, K data  
K
=
<CR>, <CR><CR> The data string is terminated with a termination character, generally a  
0x0d hex, but can be changed by the operator. If the Data Input Mode  
is Automatic, the data string is terminated with two successive  
termination characters.  
E-Class DPL Programmer’s Manual  
119  
Appendix G  
If HEX/ASCII mode is selected in manual Data Input Mode, only the data for Kanji or Binary  
data types will be converted, therefore the other data types and all command characters must be  
entered in ASCII format. If HEX/ASCII is selected in automatic Data Input Mode, all of the data  
must be entered in HEX/ASCII format.  
Data Append Mode String Format, Manual Formatting - barcode W1D  
D aa tt pp I  
Where:  
Field  
Valid Inputs  
Meaning  
Data Append Mode String Format indicator  
QR Code Number in Append Series, 2 decimal digits  
Total number of QR Codes in series, 2 decimal digits  
Value of Parity, 2 digits, 8 LSBs of data parity  
As above  
D
D
00, 99  
aa  
tt  
pp  
e
H, Q, M, L  
m
0 – 8, none  
As above  
i
A, a, M, m  
As above  
cdata  
N, A, B, K  
As above  
immediately followed by data  
<CR>, <CR><CR>  
term  
As above  
Characteristics  
Models:  
Model 1 (original version), bar code versions 1 through 14  
A. ECC Levels ‘H’, ‘M’, ‘Q’, and ‘L’  
B. Mask Selection Automatic or 0 through 8  
C. Data Input Modes Automatic and Manual  
D. Data Append Mode  
Model 2 (enhanced version), bar code versions 1 through 40  
A. ECC Levels ‘H’, ‘M’, ‘Q’, and ‘L’  
B. Mask Selection Automatic or 0 through 8  
C. Data Input Modes Automatic and Manual  
D. Data Append Mode  
Representation of data:  
Dark Cell = Binary 1  
Light Cell = Binary 0  
Symbol Size (not including quiet zone, 4 cells on each of the 4 sides):  
Model 1: 21 X 21 cells to 73 X 73 cells (Versions 1 to 14, increase in steps of 4 cells per side)  
Model 2: 21 X 21 cells to 177 X 177 cells (Versions 1 to 40, increase in steps of 4 cells per side)  
Data Characters per symbol (maximum for symbol size):  
Numeric Data  
Model 1; Version 14; ECC = L: 1,167 characters  
Model 2; Version 40; ECC = L: 7,089 characters  
120  
E-Class DPL Programmer’s Manual  
Appendix G  
Alphanumeric Data  
Model 1; Version 14; ECC = L: 707 characters  
Model 2; Version 40; ECC = L: 4,296 characters  
Binary Data  
Model 1; Version 14; ECC = L: 486 characters  
Model 2; Version 40; ECC = L: 2,953 characters  
Kanji Data  
Model 1; Version 14; ECC = L: 299 characters  
Model 2; Version 40; ECC = L: 1,817 characters  
Selectable Error Correction – Four levels of Reed-Solomon error correction allowing recovery of the  
symbol codewords:  
L
7%  
M 15%  
Q 25%  
H 30%  
Code Type: Matrix  
Orientation Independence: Yes  
Example  
<STX>L  
D11<CR>  
1W1D44000001000102HThis is the data portion also with  
binary <0xfe><0xca><0x83><0x0D><0x0D>  
121100000000100Barcode W1D<CR>  
E
Barcode W1D  
Where:  
QR Code barcode, Cell Size = 0.1 inch square, positioned at X =. 1” and Y = .1”, ECC=H, Mask =  
Automatic, Data Input Mode = Automatic:  
1W1D1100000100010HThis is the data portion also with binary  
<0xfe><0xca><0x83><0x0D><0x0D>  
Other examples  
DPL field record, QR Code barcode, Cell Size = 0.04 inch square, positioned at X = .1” and Y =  
.1”, ECC = H, Mask = 3, Data Input Mode = Automatic:  
1W1D4400000100010H3This is the data portion also with binary  
<0xfe><0xca><0x83><0x0D><0x0D>  
DPL field record, QR Code barcode, Cell Size = 0.08 inch square, positioned at X = .1” and Y =  
.1”, ECC = L, Mask = None (8), Data Input Mode = Manual - Kanji:  
1W1D8800000100010L8MK<0x81><0x40><0x81><0x41><0x81><0x42><0x0D>  
DPL field record, QR Code barcode, Cell Size = 0.01 inch square, positioned at X = .1” and Y =  
.1”, ECC = L, Mask = None (8), Data Input Mode = Manual - Kanji (in Hex/ASCII format):  
1W1D1100000100010L8mK814081418142<0x0D>  
E-Class DPL Programmer’s Manual  
121  
Appendix G  
DPL field record, QR Code barcode, Cell Size = 0.01 inch square, positioned at X = .1” and Y =  
.1”, ECC = M, Mask = Automatic, Data Input Mode = Automatic:  
1W1d1100000100010Pallet 35FGA, Box 55367, Datamax Corp,  
Orlando, Florida 32707<0x0D><0x0D>  
DPL field record, QR Code barcode, Cell Size = 0.01 inch square, positioned at X = .1” and Y =  
.1”, ECC = M (default), Mask = Automatic (default), Data Input Mode = Automatic (in Hex  
/ASCII format):  
1W1D1100000100010a384A384B384C384D384E384F<0x0D><0x0D>  
W1f / W1F: Aztec  
Valid Characters: All ASCII characters, depending upon the selected options.  
Variable Length (W1f): This two dimensional barcode holds a large amount of data in a small area  
an can provide a high level of error checking.  
Specified Length (W1F): With a string four-digit length specifier, values 0x00 through 0xFF to be  
included within the data strings without conflicting with the DPL format record terminators.  
Record Structure: a W1 b c d eee ffff gggg [hhhh] i jjj kk…k  
Where:  
Field  
Valid Inputs  
1,2,3, and 4  
Meaning  
a
Rotation  
W1  
b
W1  
f and F  
Fixed value, extended bar code set  
Lowercase selects the Aztec bar code, variable length  
Uppercase selects the Aztec barcode with a Byte Count Specifier  
Module size horizontal multiplier, 0 = default size. The c/d module size  
parameters should be equal to produce a square symbol. When the label  
command (Dwh) is used to generate larger text, then c and d may be used  
to compensate and ensure a square symbol.  
c
0 to 9 and A to O  
0 to 9 and A to O  
d
Module size vertical multiplier, 0 = default size (See explanation for ‘c’,  
above.)  
eee  
000  
No Effect  
ffff  
gggg  
0000 to 9999  
0000 to 9999  
0000 to 9999  
Label position, row  
Label position, column  
Optional string length specifier. Field termination is set by this byte count.  
This decimal value includes all of the data following this byte count field,  
but does not include itself.  
[hhhh]  
i
jjj  
0, 1  
000 to 300  
Extended Channel Interpretation (ECI) mode; 0 = Disabled, 1 = Enabled  
Error Correction (EC) / Amount (see table below), where:  
000 – Default EC, approximately 23%  
001 – 099 EC fixed value, expressed as a percent.  
101 – 104 Compact core, 1 to 4 layers respectively.  
201 – 232 Full size core, 1 to 32 layers respectively.  
300 – Rune format, encodes three ASCII decimal digits 0-256; scanner  
decode output is decimal number 0-256  
kk…k  
8-bit data, followed by Data to be encoded.  
a termination character  
122  
E-Class DPL Programmer’s Manual  
Appendix G  
The error correction or size selection determines the symbol size and other characteristics of the  
symbol, as shown in the following table. Attempting to encode more data that has been made  
available will result in no symbol printed.  
Error Correction (EC) / Size Implications  
Symbol  
Size[1]  
Symbol  
Format  
Maximum[2] Binary Maximum[2] Alphabetic  
Maximum[2]  
Numeric Characters  
3832  
jjj  
Data Bytes  
Characters  
000  
001 to 099  
variable  
variable  
data dependant  
data and EC  
dependant  
1914  
1914  
3067  
3067  
3832  
101  
102  
102  
103  
104  
15  
19  
19  
23  
27  
compact  
compact  
compact  
compact  
compact  
6
12  
33  
33  
57  
89  
13  
40  
40  
70  
110  
19  
19  
33  
53  
201  
202  
203  
204  
205  
206  
207  
208  
209  
210  
211  
212  
213  
214  
215  
216  
217  
218  
219  
220  
221  
222  
223  
224  
225  
226  
227  
228  
229  
230  
231  
232  
19  
23  
27  
31  
37  
41  
45  
49  
53  
57  
61  
67  
71  
75  
79  
83  
87  
full size  
full size  
full size  
full size  
full size  
full size  
full size  
full size  
full size  
full size  
full size  
full size  
full size  
full size  
full size  
full size  
full size  
full size  
full size  
full size  
full size  
full size  
full size  
full size  
full size  
full size  
full size  
full size  
full size  
full size  
full size  
full size  
8
24  
40  
62  
15  
40  
68  
104  
144  
187  
236  
291  
348  
414  
482  
554  
636  
718  
808  
900  
18  
49  
84  
128  
178  
232  
294  
362  
433  
516  
601  
691  
793  
896  
1008  
1123  
1246  
1378  
1511  
1653  
1801  
1956  
2116  
2281  
2452  
2632  
2818  
3007  
3205  
3409  
3616  
3832  
87  
114  
145  
179  
214  
256  
298  
343  
394  
446  
502  
559  
621  
687  
753  
824  
898  
976  
1056  
1138  
1224  
1314  
1407  
1501  
1600  
1702  
1806  
1914  
998  
91  
95  
1104  
1210  
1324  
1442  
1566  
1694  
1826  
1963  
2107  
2256  
2407  
2565  
2728  
2894  
3067  
101  
105  
109  
113  
117  
121  
125  
131  
135  
139  
143  
147  
151  
300  
11  
Rune  
1
1
1
1 Measured in module size x, assuming default module size (cd=00).  
2 Maximum sizes are approximate and data dependant, and may be less than indicated.  
Table G-2: Aztec Characteristics Index  
E-Class DPL Programmer’s Manual  
123  
Appendix G  
Error Correction  
Size 001 to 099: This value specifies the percent of symbol code words to be used for error  
correction. Actual error correction word percentage will vary depending on data. The default value,  
approximately 23%, is recommended. Any other value may be selected to meet the user’s needs.  
Some minimum-security codewords may be generated depending on the data sent for encoding,  
particularly when the volume of that data is small. It the data capacity is exceeded no symbol is  
printed.  
Size 101 to 104: Values 101 through 104 result in 1 through 4 layers (two modules thick)  
respectively, around the center finder pattern. Data volume constraints apply as indicated in the table  
above. Symbols will be of the compact form. All available codewords will be used for error  
correction. It the data capacity is exceeded no symbol is printed.  
Size 201 to 232: Values 201 through 232 result in 1 through 32 layers (two modules thick)  
respectively, around the center finder pattern. Data volume constraints apply as indicated in the table  
above. Symbols will be of the full-size form. All available codewords will be used for error  
correction. It the data capacity is exceeded no symbol is printed.  
Size 300: Value 300 informs the printer that the data, which follows will be used to encode one  
RUNE symbol. The data consists of one to three ASCII digits with value range of 0 to 256. The data  
may include leading zeros. Data-streams longer than three digits or data that includes non-numeric  
characters may have unpredictable results.  
Extended Channel Interpretation Mode: A value of 1 provides for extended channel codewords to  
be inserted into the barcode symbol, using escape sequences in the datastream. This mode also  
provides for effective Code 128 and UCC/EAN 128 emulations, when used in with appropriately  
configured barcode readers. The valid values for escape sequences are of the form <ESC>n, where:  
<ESC> – 1 byte with value 2710 = 1B16  
n – 1 ASCII digit, range 0 through 6  
These escape sequences are encoded as FLG(n) character pairs described in the International  
Symbology Specification – Aztec Code, AIM, 1997-11-05, and the meanings of the values for n are  
the same in both.  
<ESC>0 – Is encoded as FLG(0), and interpreted as FNC1 or <G > depending on its  
S
location in the datastream. The printer does not validate <ESC>0 locations  
in the datastream.  
When <ESC>0 is the leading data in the stream, it is interpreted as a FNC1 as used  
in the Code 128 symbology, and specifically for UCC/EAN 128 applications. For  
appropriately configured scanners this will be interpreted/transmitted as a ]C1  
symbology identifier preamble. The printer does not validate UCC/EAN 128 data  
syntax.  
When <ESC>0 follows a single alphabetic or two numeric characters respectively,  
then it also interpreted as a FNC1. For appropriately configured scanners this would  
be interpreted/transmitted as a ]C2 symbology identifier preamble, and the alpha or  
numeric characters preceding the FNC1 are Application Indicators assigned by AIM  
International. The printer does not check AI validity.  
When <ESC>0 is anywhere else in the datastream, a <G > replaces it in the barcode  
S
symbol, as with UCC/EAN 128 field separators.  
124  
E-Class DPL Programmer’s Manual  
Appendix G  
<ESC>n – Is encoded as FLG(n), and is interpreted as signaling Extended Channel  
Interpretation. When the value of n is from 1 to 6, it signals that the following n  
digits comprise an extended channel identifier for use with ECI compliant barcode  
scanners. An erroneous barcode symbol may result from failing to follow <ESC>n  
with n digits. Any <ESC>0 following <ESC>n and not within the n digits will be  
encoded as FLG(0). In the context of a FLG(n), any backslash ‘\’ (9210) will be  
interpreted by the scanner as two backslashes ‘\\’.  
Sample 1: The variable length example encodes “AZTEC” with no ECI input, and 23% error  
correction, and prints the bar code. A line of text is also printed.  
<STX>L  
D11<CR>  
1W1f00000001501000000AZTEC<CR>  
121100000000100Barcode W1f<CR>  
E
Barcode W1f  
Sample 2: The specified length example includes a byte count field for all bytes that follow until the  
end of the barcode data. The byte count is 17. The symbology encodes  
“AZTEC<CR>barcode”, and prints the bar code. Notice that a <CR> does not terminate  
the barcode format record. A line of text is also printed.  
<STX>L  
D11<CR>  
1W1F000000015010000170000AZTEC<0x0D>barcode  
121100000000100Barcode W1F<CR>  
E
Barcode W1F  
Functions Not Supported  
Structured Append  
Reader Initialization Symbol Generation  
Module shaving  
E-Class DPL Programmer’s Manual  
125  
Appendix G  
W1T: TCIF Linked Barcode 3 of 9 (TLC39)  
TLC39 is a telecommunications barcode which encodes a six digit sequence in a standard 3 of 9  
barcode (code 39) followed by a link flag character in code 3 of 9 and a 25 character alphanumeric  
serial number encoded in MicroPDF417.  
Syntax:  
a W1 t c d eee ffff gggg hhhhhh ; i…i  
(note: spaces shown for clarity)  
Where:  
Field  
Valid Inputs  
1,2,3, and 4  
W1  
Meaning  
a
Rotation  
W1  
Fixed value, extended barcode set  
Selects TLC39 barcode  
t
t
c
d
0 to 9 and A to O  
0 to 9 and A to O  
001 to 999  
0000 to 9999  
0000 to 9999  
ECI Data  
Wide bar of Code 39, ratio of wide to narrow must be between 2:1 and 3:1  
Narrow bar of Code 39  
Height of Code 39  
eee  
ffff  
gggg  
hhhhhh  
;
Label position, row  
Label position, column  
Six digit ECI number  
Parses data  
Fixed  
i…i  
S/N Data  
Up to 25 alphanumeric serial number  
NOTES:  
The ECI number must be six digits followed by a semi colon. If the seventh character is not a semi colon  
then only a six digit code 39 will print.  
The link flag is the character “T” in code 39 without a start/stop indicator. The location of this flag is based  
on the ECI code location, length and height.  
The serial number may contain up to 25 alphanumeric characters and is encoded in the MicroPDF417  
symbol. This symbol is fixed at 4 columns and the rows are determined based on the following:  
Number of Alphanumeric Data  
Number of Rows  
1-14  
15-22  
23-25  
4
6
8
The location of the MicroPDF417 symbol is based on the location of ECI barcode. The symbol’s  
module width and height are fixed at the default.  
The following example prints a TLC39  
barcode.  
<STX>L  
D11  
1Wt0000001500150123456;ABCD123456789  
01234  
1911A0801300170A1B2C3DAAA  
E
126  
E-Class DPL Programmer’s Manual  
Appendix G  
W1z / W1Z: MicroPDF417  
Valid Characters: All ASCII characters, depending on the selected options.  
Variable Length: This is a 2 dimensional barcode capable of holding large amounts of data in a small  
area. It provides a high level of redundancy and error checking.  
Specified Length: With a string four-digit length specifier, values 0x00 through 0xFF to be included  
within the data strings without conflicting with the DPL format record terminators.  
Record Structure: a W1 b c d eee ffff gggg [hhhh] i j k l 0 mm…m  
Where:  
Field  
Valid Inputs  
1,2,3, and 4  
Meaning  
a
Rotation  
W1  
b
W1  
z and Z  
Fixed value, extended barcode set  
Lowercase selects the MicroPDF417 bar code, variable length  
Uppercase selects the MicroPDF417 barcode with a Byte Count  
Specifier.  
c
d
0 to 9 and A to O  
0 to 9 and A to O  
000  
0000 to 9999  
0000 to 9999  
0000 to 9999  
Module size horizontal multiplier; 0 = default size.  
Module size vertical multiplier; 0 = default size.  
No Effect  
Label position, row  
Label position, column  
Optional string length specifier. Field termination is set by this byte  
count. This decimal value includes all of the data following this byte  
count field, but does not include itself.  
Number of columns  
eee  
ffff  
gggg  
[hhhh]  
i
1 to 4  
j
0 to 9 and A  
Row / Error Correction index  
k
l
0
0, 1  
0, 1  
0
Byte Compaction Mode (1)  
Macro Character Substitution Disable (1)  
Fixed ASCII digit 0. Reserved for future use.  
mm…m  
8-bit data, followed by a Data to be encoded  
termination character  
The number of columns (i) and the row / error correction index (j) combine to form a  
row/column/error correction selection index (ij) which determines other characteristics of the symbol  
as shown in the following table.  
E-Class DPL Programmer’s Manual  
127  
Appendix G  
Row/Column/Error Correction Selection Index Implications  
i j  
Rows Columns Maximum Symbol Symbol  
Maximum  
Width[2] Height[3] Binary Data  
Bytes[4]  
Maximum  
Alphabetic  
Maximum  
Numeric  
Errors  
Corrected[1]  
Characters[5] Characters[5]  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
11  
14  
17  
20  
24  
28  
1
1
1
1
1
1
4
4
4
5
5
5
40  
40  
40  
40  
40  
40  
24  
30  
36  
42  
50  
58  
3
7
10  
13  
18  
22  
6
8
12  
18  
22  
30  
38  
17  
26  
32  
44  
55  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
8
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
5
6
6
7
8
57  
57  
57  
57  
57  
57  
57  
18  
24  
30  
36  
42  
48  
54  
8
14  
24  
36  
46  
56  
67  
72  
20  
35  
52  
67  
82  
11  
14  
17  
20  
23  
26  
14  
21  
27  
33  
38  
43  
10  
12  
93  
105  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
37  
38  
39  
6
8
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
9
84  
84  
84  
84  
84  
84  
84  
84  
84  
84  
14  
18  
22  
26  
32  
42  
54  
66  
78  
90  
6
10  
18  
26  
34  
46  
66  
90  
114  
138  
162  
14  
26  
38  
49  
67  
11  
13  
15  
18  
23  
29  
35  
41  
47  
10  
15  
20  
27  
39  
54  
68  
82  
97  
10  
12  
15  
20  
26  
32  
38  
44  
96  
132  
167  
202  
237  
40  
41  
42  
43  
44  
45  
46  
47  
48  
49  
4A  
4
6
8
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
5
9
101  
101  
101  
101  
101  
101  
101  
101  
101  
101  
101  
10  
14  
18  
22  
26  
32  
42  
54  
66  
78  
90  
8
13  
20  
27  
34  
45  
63  
85  
14  
22  
34  
46  
58  
20  
32  
49  
67  
85  
111  
155  
208  
261  
313  
366  
11  
13  
15  
18  
23  
29  
35  
41  
47  
10  
12  
15  
20  
26  
32  
38  
44  
76  
106  
142  
178  
214  
250  
106  
128  
150  
1 Can be any combination of 1erasures + 2substitutions (e.g. 13 maximum number of errors corrected might include 7  
erasures and 3 substitutions).  
2 Includes 1 module width quiet zone on either side.  
3 Assumes the module height is 2module width, and includes one module width quiet zones on top and bottom.  
4 Assumes Binary Compaction.  
5 Assumes Text Compaction.  
Table G-3: MicroPDF417 Characteristics Index  
Note: Increasing the row/column/error correction values does not necessarily result in the ability  
to encode more data.  
Byte Compaction Mode: A value of 1 forces Byte Compaction, the best compression for binary  
data. The compaction ratio is six 8-bit bytes of data compressed into 5 symbol codewords. See the  
table above for the maximum data allowed for any row/column/error correction selection index.  
Macro Character Substitution Disable: By default, Macro Character Substitution is enabled (0).  
When enabled, Byte Compaction has priority over Macro Character Substitution. When Macro  
128  
E-Class DPL Programmer’s Manual  
Appendix G  
Character Substitution is enabled, the datastream header and trailer are compacted when they  
conform to the following forms:  
[)>R 05G data R EoT  
S
S
S
or  
[)>R 06G data R EoT  
S
S
S
where:  
G
data may not contain adjacent bytes with values R or  
S
S
R
(
S = 3010 , 1E16 and G = 2910 , 1D16 and EoT = 410 ,416)  
S
Sample 1: The variable length example prints a MicroPDF417 barcode with 1 column and 24 rows,  
33% error correction, no byte compaction, and macro character substitution enabled.  
<STX>L  
D11<CR>  
1W1z000000015010014000PDF417<CR>  
121100000000100Barcode W1z<CR>  
E
Barcode W1z  
Sample 2: The specified length example includes a byte count field for all bytes that follow until the  
end of the barcode data. The byte count is 12. The symbology encodes “pdf<CR>417”,  
and prints the barcode. Notice that a <CR> does not terminate the barcode format record.  
A line of text is also printed.  
<STX>L  
D11<CR>  
1W1Z0000000150100001214000pdf<0x0D>417  
121100000000100Barcode W1Z<CR>  
E
Barcode W1Z  
Functions Not Supported  
General Purpose Extended Channel Interpretations, including Code-128 emulation.  
Structured Append  
Reader Initialization Symbol Generation  
Module shaving  
E-Class DPL Programmer’s Manual  
129  
Appendix G  
130  
E-Class DPL Programmer’s Manual  
Appendix H  
Font Mapping: Single-Byte and Double-Byte Characters  
Label format records with font code 9 in the b field of the Format Record header can specify any of the  
following bit-mapped or scalable fonts with the associated specification in the font size/selection (eee  
height) field, as shown in the tables on the following pages.  
Example: 1911u4000100010A0215134<CR>  
The example above will produce a printed string consisting of the two Kanji characters referenced by the  
two HEX ASCII pairs A0, 21, and 51, 34, on appropriately equipped printers.  
Example: 1911U4001000100P012P012<0x38><0x77><0x00>  
The above example will produce a printed string consisting of the one 12 point Kanji character  
referenced by the byte pair with hex values 38 and 77 on appropriately equipped printers.  
Note: Double-byte hex representation character strings terminate with two null bytes and a <CR>, i.e.,  
0x 00 00 0D. The Hex-ASCII representation is terminated with <CR>.  
The alphanumeric portion (nn) of the scalable font specifiers, Snn, Unn, unn, numbering system is a base  
62 numbering system, 0, 1, 2…8, 9, A, B, C...X, Y, Z, a, b, c...x, y, z. For scalable fonts the S designation  
signifies single-byte characters while the U designates double-byte characters. The lower case U  
counterpart signifies that print data in the label format record is in a hex-ASCII format. Fonts that have  
been downloaded with designators of the form nn, where nn are alphanumeric, as seen in the font size  
specifier (eee height) column below, may be referenced in label format records by their upper or lower  
case specifiers as available. However, fonts created for double-byte access cannot be accessed using Snn  
as the font designator, and vice versa, single-byte fonts cannot be accessed using Unn or unn.  
Note: Downloading scalable fonts requires specifying the font ID, a two character alphanumeric. The  
S, or U, u used in referencing the font within label format records is not used in the download  
specification. Attempting to utilize a scalable font with an inappropriate byte-size designation,  
(e.g. S on double-byte or U, u on single-byte) will have unpredictable results.  
E-Class DPL Programmer’s Manual  
131  
Appendix H  
Font 9, Font Specifications (eee Height) and Associated Characteristics  
Font  
Name  
Character  
Mapping  
Font Size Specifier  
(eee Height)  
Point  
Size  
Font 9 Bit-Mapped Internal Fonts  
Single-Byte 000 - 010  
CG Triumvirate[1]  
CG Triumvirate[1]  
5, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 18, 24, 30,  
36, 48, respectively  
Single-Byte  
A04, A05, A06, A08, A10, 4, 5, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 18, 24,  
A12, A14, A18, A24, A30, 30, 36, 48, 72, respectively  
A36, A48, A72  
Font 9 Bit-Mapped Downloaded Fonts  
Single-Byte 100 - 999  
User downloaded  
user defined  
bit-mapped typeface  
Font 9 Scalable Resident Fonts Specifications (optional)  
CG Triumvirate  
Bold Condensed  
Scalable[1]  
Single-Byte  
S00  
scalable  
scalable  
CG Triumvirate[1]  
Scalable  
Single-Byte  
S01  
Font 9 Scalable Resident Fonts Specifications (optional)  
CG Times  
Scalable  
CG Times Italic  
Scalable  
CG Times Bold  
Scalable  
CG Times Bold  
Italic  
Single-Byte  
Single-Byte  
Single-Byte  
Single-Byte  
SA0  
SA1  
SA2  
SA3  
scalable  
scalable  
scalable  
scalable  
Scalable  
Gothic B Kanji  
Scalable  
Gothic B Kanji  
Scalable  
GB Simplified  
Chinese Scalable  
GB Simplified  
Chinese Scalable  
Korean Hangul  
Scalable  
Double-Byte (Binary)  
Double-Byte (Hex ASCII)  
Double-Byte (Binary)  
U40  
u40  
scalable  
scalable  
scalable  
scalable  
scalable  
scalable  
UC0  
uC0  
UH0  
uH0  
Double-Byte (Hex ASCII)  
Double-Byte (Binary)  
Korean Hangul  
Scalable  
Double-Byte (Hex ASCII)  
Font 9 Scalable Downloaded Fonts  
User downloaded  
Scalable typeface  
User downloaded  
Scalable typeface  
User downloaded  
Scalable typeface  
1 Standard internal fonts  
Single-Byte (Binary)  
S50 - S5z...  
S90 - S9z  
U50...,U5z...,...U90...,  
U9z  
u50...,u5z...,...u90...,  
u9z  
scalable  
scalable  
scalable  
Double-Byte (Binary)  
Double-Byte (Hex ASCII)  
Table H-1: Font 9 Specifications  
132  
E-Class DPL Programmer’s Manual  
Appendix I  
Symbol Sets and Character Maps  
Symbol Set Selection  
Scalable fonts are mapped through a symbol set sometimes referred to as a ‘code page’. This mapping  
allows the host application to select a variety of characters to match the application. For example in the  
code page CP, character code 0xE4 causes character Φ to be printed. In code page E7, the character code  
0xE4 causes δ to be printed. Each of the code pages allows the host application to “emulate” a character  
set for their application. The code page (symbol set) is selected using a DPL Command, <STX>ySxx,  
where xx is the two letter code page Identifier.  
Note: Not all fonts have an entire compliment of character codes for a given code page (symbol set).  
Single-Byte Code Pages  
Code Page Identifier  
Datamax  
Font Format  
IntelliFont  
Description  
HP[1]  
TrueType  
AR  
CP  
Arabic-8  
PC Cyrillic  
D1[4]  
D2[4]  
D3[4]  
DN  
DS[4]  
DT  
E1  
11L  
12L  
13L  
ITC Zapf Dingbats/100  
ITC Zapf Dingbats/200  
ITC Zapf Dingbats/300  
ISO 60 Danish / Norwegian  
PS ITC Zapf Dingbats  
DeskTop  
ISO 8859/1 Latin 1  
ISO 8859/2 Latin 2  
ISO 8859/9 Latin 5  
ISO 8859/10 Latin 6  
ISO 8859/7 Latin/Greek  
ISO 8859/7 Latin/Greek  
ISO 8859/8 Latin/Hebrew  
ISO 8859/5 Latin/Cyrillic  
ISO 69: French  
Greek-8  
PC-8 Greek  
ISO 21: German  
Hebrew-7  
Hebrew-8  
ISO 15: Italian  
Legal  
Math-8  
Macintosh  
10L  
7J  
0N  
2N  
5N  
6N  
E2  
E5  
E6  
E7  
EG  
EH  
ER  
FR  
G8  
GK  
GR  
H0  
H8  
IT  
LG  
M8  
MC  
MS  
1U  
8M  
12J  
5M  
PS Math  
Table I-1: Single-Byte Code Pages  
E-Class DPL Programmer’s Manual  
133  
Appendix I  
Single-Byte Code Pages (continued)  
Code Page Identifier  
Datamax  
Font Format  
Description  
HP[1]  
6J  
IntelliFont  
TrueType  
PB  
PC  
PD  
Microsoft Publishing  
PC-8, Code Page 437  
PC-8 D/N, Code Page 437N  
PC-852 Latin 2  
PC-851 Latin/Greek  
PC-862 Latin/Hebrew  
Pi Font  
PC-850 Multilingual  
PC-864 Latin/Arabic  
PC-8 TK, Code Page 437T  
PC-1004  
10U  
11U  
17U  
PE  
PG  
PH  
PI  
PM  
PR  
15U  
12U  
PT  
PU  
9T  
9J  
PV  
26U  
PC-775 Baltic  
PTXT3000  
PX[4]  
R8  
8U  
Roman-8  
SP  
ISO 17: Spanish  
ISO 11: Swedish  
Symbol  
SW  
SY[4]  
TK  
Turkish-8  
TS  
UK  
US  
10J  
PS Text  
ISO 4: United Kingdom  
ISO 6: ASCII  
Ventura International  
Ventura Math  
Ventura US  
Windows 3.1 Latin 1  
Windows Latin/Arabic  
Wingdings  
Windows 3.1 Latin 2  
Windows Latin/Greek  
Windows 3.1 Baltic (Latv, Lith)  
Windows  
Windows 3.0 Latin 1  
Windows Latin/Cyrillic  
Windows 3.1 Latin 5  
VI  
13J  
6M  
14J  
19U  
VM  
VU  
W1[3]  
WA  
WD[4]  
WE[3]  
WG[3]  
WL[3]  
WN  
WO  
WR[3]  
WT[3]  
9E  
19L  
9U  
5T  
1 HP - Hewlett Packard PCL-5 Comparison Guide, Ed 1, Internal Symbol Set Charts, Chart B, for comparison.  
2 Symbol Set support requires a matching font (Datamax ILPC CG Times supports many of these; see note 4, below).  
3 As of this writing, the following symbol sets contain references to the Euro currency symbol ( ) with the associated single-byte  
decimal values:  
W1 - Windows 3.1 Latin 1 - 128  
WE - Windows 3.1 Latin 2 - 128  
WG - Windows Latin/Greek - 128  
WL - Windows 3.1 Windows 3.1 Baltic - 128  
WT - Windows 3.1 Latin 5 - 128  
WR - Windows Latin/Cyrillic – 136  
4 Not supported by ILPC CG Times – characters appearing in Code Page identifiers not supported are unpredictable.  
Table I-1: Single-Byte Code Pages  
134  
E-Class DPL Programmer’s Manual  
Appendix I  
Double-Byte Symbols, Chinese, Kanji and Korean  
Character Map Selection  
Double-byte scalable fonts are mapped through a ‘character map’. This mapping allows the host  
application to select a variety of characters to match the application. Each of the code pages allows the  
host application to emulate a character set for their application.  
The double-byte symbol set is selected using the <STX>yUxx command.  
Double-Byte Character Map  
Character Map TrueType Font  
Description  
Identifier  
Format  
B5  
EU  
BIG 5 (Taiwan) encoded  
EUC (Extended UNIX Code)  
Government Bureau Industry Standard; Chinese (PRC) Default.  
GB  
JS  
SJ  
JIS (Japanese Industry Standard) Default.  
Shift JIS  
Unicode (including Korean)  
UC  
Table I-2: Double-Byte Character Map  
The double-byte symbol set is selected using <STX>yUxx command. The single-byte symbol set is  
selected using the same command, <STX>ySxx. Each affects an independent database selection and has  
no impact on the other.  
E-Class DPL Programmer’s Manual  
135  
Appendix I  
136  
E-Class DPL Programmer’s Manual  
Appendix J  
Module Identifiers, Field Limits, Print Resolutions, & Column Values  
Module Identifer  
Memory Type  
DRAM (default size: 256 K Bytes)  
Flash[1]  
A
B
C
Default (A or B Module, as assigned by <STX>X)  
1 The availability/size of the Internal Flash Module is dependent upon the installed font option (expandable with the  
Flash Memory Expansion Option) and available Flash memory; reference the Configuration Label, or following the  
<STX>KC command the “INTERNAL FLASH MODULE PRESENT” message. The Flash memory has limited  
writes and is intended for permanent (or semi-permanent) storage of downloaded images, fonts and label formats.  
Table J-1: Module Identifiers  
Printer Model  
Maximum Format Fields[2]  
Total Characters for all Fields  
All E-Class Models  
450  
16,000  
2 When the product of the number of fields and characters in each field exceeds the available printer memory (the  
limiting factor), portions of the label may not print.  
Table J-2 Field & Characters Limits  
Print  
Resolution  
Dot Dimensions  
(Nominal)  
Maximum  
Print Width  
Maximum  
“gggg” Value  
Printer  
Model  
DPI DPMM  
Inches  
Millimeters Dots Millimeters Inch Metric  
E4203 / E4204  
E4304  
203  
300  
8.0  
.0043 x .0052 .11 x .13  
832  
104.1  
105.7  
0410 1041  
0410 1041  
11.8 .0028 x .0056 .07 x .14 1248  
Table J-3: Print Widths, Resolutions, and Record Column Field Values  
E-Class DPL Programmer’s Manual  
137  
Appendix J  
138  
E-Class DPL Programmer’s Manual  
Appendix K  
Speed Ranges and Defaults  
Speed  
Millimeters Per Second  
Speed Command Value  
Inches Per Second  
A
B
C
D
E
F
1.0  
1.5  
2.0  
2.5  
3.0  
3.5  
4.0  
25  
38  
51  
63  
76  
89  
102  
G
Table K-1: Speed Values  
Print  
Slew  
Backfeed  
Printer Model  
Range  
Default  
Range  
A-G  
Default  
Range  
A-C  
Default  
All E-Class Models[1]  
A-G  
G
G
C
1 The E-4203 maximum speed is limited to ‘E’ unless the optional regulated power supply is attached.  
Table K-2: Speed Ranges and Defaults  
E-Class DPL Programmer’s Manual  
139  
Appendix K  
140  
E-Class DPL Programmer’s Manual  
Appendix L  
Commands by Function  
Commands by Function  
Function  
Assign Font ID Number  
Backfeed Time Delay  
Character Download Data  
Character Code  
Character Encoding  
Character (Hex) Dump Mode  
Clear All Modules  
Command(s)  
<ESC>*cnnnD  
<STX>Kbnnn  
<ESC>(snnnWdata  
<ESC>*cnnnE  
<STX>KEex  
<STX>P  
<STX>Q  
Clear Module  
<STX>qa  
Controlled Pause  
<STX>p  
Cycle Cutter  
<STX>o  
Database Configuration  
Delete File from Module  
Enable Feedback Characters  
Enter Label Formatting Command Mode  
Font Descriptor  
<STX>KDwxyz  
<STX>xmfname  
<STX>a  
<STX>L  
<ESC>)snnnW  
<STX>F  
Form Feed  
Get Configuration  
<STX>KC  
Get Printer Time and Date Information  
Image Data Downloading  
Label Format String Replacement Field  
<STX>B  
<STX>Iabfnamecr  
<STX>U[T]nnss…s  
Make Last Field Entered Decrement Numeric (Alphanumeric ) -(<)fii  
Make Last Field Entered Increment Numeric (Alphanumeric) +(>)fii  
Mark Previous Field as a String Replacement Field  
Memory Query  
Memory Reset  
U
<STX>KQ  
<STX>KR  
Memory Configuration  
<STX>Kix[:jy][:kz] cr , or <STX>KS or <STX>KW  
Offset Distance, Top of Form Distance  
Output Sensor Values  
Pack Module  
Place Data in Global Register  
Print Configuration and Dot Pattern Labels  
Print Last Label Format  
<STX>Ksnn  
<STX>Y  
<STX>zm  
G
<STX>Z  
<STX>G  
<STX>Tstring  
<STX>T  
<STX>Sa  
rname  
Print Time and Date  
Printhead Dot Pattern Test Label  
Recall Global Data and Place in Field  
Recall Stored Label Format  
Request Firmware Version  
Request Memory Module Information  
Reset  
Reset Resettable Counter  
Scalable Font Downloading  
Select Edge Sensor  
<STX>v  
<STX>Wa  
<SOH>#  
<STX>Kr  
<STX>imtaabbb...bc xxxxxxxxfff...f  
r
<STX>e  
Select Font Symbol Set  
Select Heat Setting  
<STX>ySaa, or ySxx  
Hnn  
Table L-1  
E-Class DPL Programmer’s Manual  
141  
Appendix L  
Commands by Function (continued)  
Function  
Command(s)  
Select Mirror Mode  
Select Reflective Sensor  
Send ASCII Status String  
Send Batch Quantity  
Send Status Byte  
M
<STX>r  
<SOH>A  
<SOH>E  
<SOH>F  
pa  
Set Backfeed Speed  
Set Column Offset Amount  
Set Configuration  
Set Continuous Paper Length  
Set Count By Amount  
Set Cut By Amount  
Cnnnn  
<STX>Kc  
<STX>cnnnn  
^nn  
:nnnn, or cnn  
<STX>Xm  
Dwh  
<STX>d  
<STX>Sa  
Tnn  
Set Default Module  
Set Dot Size Height and Width  
Set Double Buffer Mode  
Set Feed Speed  
Set Field Data Line Terminator  
Set Form Stop Position (Backfeed Command)  
Set Format Attribute  
<STX>fnnn  
An  
Set Imperial (Inch) Mode  
Set Maximum Label Length  
Set Metric Mode  
Set Pause for Each Label  
Set Present Distance  
<STX>n, or n  
<STX>Mnnnn  
<STX>m, or m  
<STX>J  
<STX>Kfnnnn  
fa  
Set Present Speed  
Set Print Quantity  
Qnnnnn  
Set Print Speed  
Pa  
Set Quantity for Stored Labels  
Set Row Offset Amount  
Set Single Buffer Mode  
Set Slew Speed  
<STX>Ennnn  
Rnnnn  
<STX>s  
Sa  
Set Start of Print Position  
Set Time and Date  
<STX>Onnnn  
<STX>AwMMddyearhhmmjjj  
Software Switch Settings  
SOH Shutdown  
Stop / Cancel  
Store Label in Module  
Symbol Set Select  
<STX>Vn  
<SOH>D  
<SOH>C  
smname  
ySaa  
Terminate Label-Formatting Mode and Print  
Terminate Label-Formatting Mode without Printing  
Test Flash Memory Module  
Test DRAM Memory Module  
Test RS-232 Port  
Toggle Pause  
Update System Database with Current Database  
Zero (Ø) Conversion to “0”  
E
X
<STX>w  
<STX>t  
<STX>k  
<SOH>B  
<SOH>U  
z
Table L-1  
142  
E-Class DPL Programmer’s Manual  
Appendix M  
Image Loading  
The printer will accept four types of image files: .BMP, .IMG, .PCX and a special Datamax 7-bit ASCII  
file (as defined in this section). Using the Datamax 7-bit ASCII format will require at least twice as much  
data transmission time as the other formats (see <STX>I). The Datamax ASCII image file format is made  
up of a set of records with identical formats, each representing a dot row of the image. The last of these  
records is followed by a terminator.  
Dot-row record  
Dot-row record  
Terminator  
Each dot-row record has the following format:  
Syntax:  
Where:  
80nndd...d<CR>  
nn  
-
-
Number character pairs in dd...d, represented in ASCII hex.  
Dot data, character pairs, ASCII hex, 00-FF  
dd…d  
Duplicate records may be encoded using a repeat data record, following the data record that needs  
duplicating. The repeat data record format is:  
Syntax:  
Where:  
0000FFnn<CR>  
nn Is the number of duplicates, ASCII hex, 00-FF.  
-
The terminator, last record, at the image download is: FFFF<CR>  
E-Class DPL Programmer’s Manual  
143  
Appendix M  
^BqA(CR)  
^BIAAFLOGO(CR)  
8030FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF0000(CR)  
8030FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF0000(CR)  
8030FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF0000(CR)  
8030FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF0000(CR)  
8030FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF0000(CR)  
8030FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF0000(CR)  
8030FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF0000(CR)  
8030FFC00000007FFC0003FFFFC001FC0001FC0003FFFFC0018000FFC001FF8000C0003FFFFE000000FFFFE0001FFFFF0000(CR)  
8030FFC00000000FFC0003FFFFC001FC0001FC0003FFFFC0018000FFC001FF800040001FFFFE0000007FFFC0001FFFFF0000(CR)  
8030FFC000000003FC0001FFFFC001FC0001FC0001FFFFC0018000FFC001FF800040001FFFFE0000003FFFC0001FFFFF0000(CR)  
8030FFC000000000FC0001FFFFC001FE0001FE0001FFFFC00180007FC000FF800060001FFFFE0000003FFFC0003FFFFF0000(CR)  
8030FFE0000000007E0001FFFFC001FE0001FE0001FFFFC00180007FC000FFC00060000FFFFE0000001FFFC0003FFFFF0000(CR)  
8030FFE0000000003E0000FFFFC001FE0000FE0000FFFFC00180007FC0007FC00020000FFFFE0000001FFF80003FFFFF0000(CR)  
8030FFE0000000001E0000FFFFC001FE0000FF0000FFFFC001C0007FC0007FC00030000FFFFE0010000FFF80003FFFFF0000(CR)  
8030FFE0000000000F0000FFFFC001FE0000FF0000FFFFC001C0007FC0007FC00030000FFFFE00180007FF80007FFFFF0000(CR)  
8030FFE0000000000700007FFFC001FF0000FF80007FFFC001C0007FC0003FC000380007FFFE00180007FF80007FFFFF0000(CR)  
8030FFF0000000000380007FFFC001FF0000FF80007FFFC001C0003FC0003FE000380007FFFE001C0003FF80007FFFFF0000(CR)  
8030FFF0000000000380007FFFC001FF0000FF80007FFFC001C0003FC0003FE000380007FFFE001E0003FF80007FFFFF0000(CR)  
8030FFF0000000000180003FFFC001FF00007FC0003FFFC001C0003FC0001FE0001C0003FFFE001E0001FF0000FFFFFF0000(CR)  
8030FFF00000000001C0003FFFC001FF00007FC0003FFFC001E0003FC0001FE0001C0003FFFE001F0000FF0000FFFFFF0000(CR)  
8030FFF00007C00000C0003FFFC001FF00007FE0003FFFC001E0003FC0000FF0001E0003FFFE001F0000FF0000FFFFFF0000(CR)  
8030FFF80007F80000E0001FFFC001FF80007FE0001FFFC001E0003FC0000FF0001E0001FFFE001F80007F0000FFFFFF0000(CR)  
8030FFF80007FC0000E00000000001FF80007FE00000000001E0001FC0000FF0001E00000000001FC0007F0000FFFFFF0000(CR)  
8030FFF80007FE0000600000000001FF80003FF00000000001E0001FC00007F0000F00000000001FC0003F0001FFFFFF0000(CR)  
8030FFF80003FF0000700000000001FF80003FF00000000001F0001FC00007F0000F00000000001FE0001E0001FFFFFF0000(CR)  
8030FFF80003FF0000700000000001FF80003FF00000000001F0001FC00007F8000F00000000001FE0001E0001FFFFFF0000(CR)  
8030FFFC0001FFC0003C0000000001FFE0001FFE0000000001F8000FC00000FC0007E0000000001FFE00000003FFFFFF0000(CR)  
8030FFFE0001FFC0001E0000000001FFE0001FFE0000000001F8000FC00000FC0007E0000000001FFF00000003FFFFFF0000(CR)  
8030FFFE0001FFC0001E0000000001FFE0001FFE0000000001F8000FC00000FC0007F0000000001FFF00000007FFFFFF0000(CR)  
8030FFFE0000FFC0001F0000000001FFE0000FFF0000000001F8000FC000007C0003F0000000001FFF80000007FFFFFF0000(CR)  
8030FFFE0000FFC0001F0000000001FFE0000FFF0000000001FC0007C000007E0003F0000000001FFF80000007FFFFFF0000(CR)  
8030FFFE0000FFE0001F0001FFC001FFE0000FFF8001FFC001FC0007C000003E0003F8000FFE001FFFC0000007FFFFFF0000(CR)  
8030FFFE0000FFE0000F8001FFC001FFF0000FFF8000FFC001FC0007C000003E0003F8000FFE001FFFE000000FFFFFFF0000(CR)  
8030FFFF0000FFE0000F8000FFC001FFF0000FFF8000FFC001FC0007C000003E0003F8000FFE001FFFE000000FFFFFFF0000(CR)  
8030FFFF0000FFE0000F8000FFC001FFF00007FFC000FFC001FC0007C000001F0001FC000FFE001FFFF000000FFFFFFF0000(CR)  
8030FFFF00007FE0000FC000FFC001FFF00007FFC0007FC001FE0007C002001F0001FC0007FE001FFFF000000FFFFFFF0000(CR)  
8030FFFF00007FF0000FC0007FC001FFF00007FFE0007FC001FE0003C002001F0001FE0007FE001FFFF800000FFFFFFF0000(CR)  
8030FFFF00007FF0000FE0007FC001FFF80007FFE0007FC001FE0003C003000F0001FE0007FE001FFFFC00001FFFFFFF0000(CR)  
8030FFFF80007FF00007E0007FC001FFF80007FFE0003FC001FE0003C003000F0001FE0003FE001FFFFC00001FFFFFFF0000(CR)  
8030FFFF80007FF00007E0003FC001FFF80003FFF0003FC001FE0003C00300078001FF0003FE001FFFFE00001FFFFFFF0000(CR)  
8030FFFF80003FF00007F0003FC001FFF80003FFF0003FC001FE0003C00380078000FF0003FE001FFFFE00001FFFFFFF0000(CR)  
8030FFFF80003FF80007F0003FC001FFF80003FFF0001FC001FF0003C00380078000FF8001FE001FFFFE00001FFFFFFF0000(CR)  
8030FFFF80003FF80007F0001FC001FFF80003FFF8001FC001FF0001C003C0038000FF8001FE001FFFFE00001FFFFFFF0000(CR)  
8030FFFFFFC0000000007FFC000001F80000000000FC000001FFF0000003FFE0000007FFC000001FFFC0003F80007FFF0000(CR)  
8030FFFFFFE000000000FFFC000001F80000000000FE000001FFF8000003FFE0000007FFE000001FFFC0003FC0003FFF0000(CR)  
8030FFFFFFF000000000FFFE000001F80000000000FE000001FFF8000003FFF0000007FFE000001FFFC0003FC0003FFF0000(CR)  
8030FFFFFFFC00000000FFFE000001FC0000000000FE000001FFF8000003FFF0000007FFE000001FFFC0003FE0001FFF0000(CR)  
8030FFFFFFFE00000000FFFE000001FC00000000007F000001FFF8000003FFF0000007FFF000001FFFC0003FE0001FFF0000(CR)  
8030FFFFFFFF00000001FFFF000001FC00000000007F000001FFF8000003FFF8000007FFF000001FFF80003FF0000FFF0000(CR)  
8030FFFFFFFFC0000001FFFF000001FC00000000007F000001FFF8000003FFF8000003FFF800001FFF80007FF0000FFF0000(CR)  
8030FFFFFFFFE0000003FFFF800001FC00000000007F800001FFFC000003FFF8000003FFF800001FFF80007FF80007FF0000(CR)  
8030FFFFFFFFF0000007FFFF800001FC00000000007F800001FFFC000003FFFC000003FFF800001FFF80007FF80007FF0000(CR)  
8030FFFFFFFFF800000FFFFF800001FE00000000003FC00001FFFC000003FFFC000003FFFC00001FFF00007FFC0003FF0000(CR)  
8030FFFFFFFFFE00001FFFFFC00001FE00000000003FC00001FFFC000003FFFE000003FFFC00001FFF00007FFC0003FF0000(CR)  
8030FFFFFFFFFF00007FFFFFC00001FE00000000003FC00001FFFC000003FFFE000003FFFE00001FFF00007FFE0001FF0000(CR)  
8030FFFFFFFFFF8003FFFFFFC00001FE00000000003FE00001FFFC000003FFFF000003FFFE00001FFF00007FFE0001FF0000(CR)  
8030FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF0000(CR)  
8030FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF0000(CR)  
8030FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF0000(CR)  
8030FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF0000(CR)  
8030FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF0000(CR)  
8030FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF0000(CR)  
8030FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF0000(CR)  
FFFF(CR)  
^BL(CR)  
1Y1100000000000LOGO(CR)  
E(CR)  
Figure M-1: Sample Datamax 7-bit ASCII File Image  
Figure M-2: Sample Label  
144  
E-Class DPL Programmer’s Manual  
Appendix N  
UPC-A and EAN-13: Variable Price and Weight Bar Code  
The EAN/UPC standard allows for an additional checksum to be generated in the middle of the bar code  
based on the data. This is used when the price or weight of an item is embedded into the bar code data  
(commonly used in the food industry).  
For the printer to generate this checksum, a ‘V’ must be placed in the data stream in the position the  
checksum is requested. If the ‘V’ is placed in the 6th position for UPC-A or the 7th position for EAN-13,  
a checksum will be generated using the next five digits in the data stream. If the ‘V’ is placed in the 7th  
position for UPC-A or the 8th position for EAN-13, a checksum will be generated using the next four  
digits in the data stream. The checksum is generated per the EAN/UPC bar code standard.  
Examples:  
1B110000200020012345V01199  
This record format prints a UPC-A bar code with the variable price checksum in the sixth position.  
1B1100002000200123456V0150  
This record format prints a UPC-A bar code with the variable price checksum in the seventh position.  
1F1100002000200123456V01199  
This record format prints an EAN-13 bar code with the variable price checksum in the seventh position.  
1F11000020002001234567V0150  
This record format prints an EAN-13 bar code with the variable price checksum in the eighth position.  
E-Class DPL Programmer’s Manual  
145  
Appendix N  
146  
E-Class DPL Programmer’s Manual  
Appendix O  
International Language Print Capability (ILPC) Programming Examples  
ILPC, offered as a field upgrade or a factory installable option, allows the printing of non-English  
character sets, available with Western European language support (CG TIMES), KANJI language  
support (GOTHIC B / GOTHIC E), and Chinese language support (SIMPLIFIED GB). All of the features  
are embedded in the printer resident firmware and accessible through DPL thus eliminating excessive  
download time of bitmapped characters. Using scalable technology licensed from AGFA, this firmware  
allows users to print smooth characters in sizes from 4pt (1.4 mm) to 999pt (350 mm) in over 40  
languages. Consult Appendix I for code page selections. Specific details regarding which characters are  
supported in each option can be obtained through Datamax Technical Support at 407-523-5540.  
ILPC - CG TIMES Option  
The CG Times Option is a single-byte scalable font consisting of four typefaces in 38 Western European  
languages. This option contains over 900 unique characters in each of the four typefaces from the CG  
Times typeface family, Normal, Italic, Bold, and Bold Italic. Single-byte scalable fonts are selected using  
a print format record (see Generating Label Formats and Appendix H for details).  
Scalable CG TIMES Font Code (‘eee’ field):  
SA0 - CG TIMES  
SA1 - CG TIMES ITALIC  
SA2 - CG TIMES BOLD  
SA3 - CG TIMES BOLD ITALIC  
Sample Greek DPL file and resulting label:  
<02>L<CR>  
D11<CR>  
ySWG<CR>  
1911SA003600020P020P020(WG) Greek Characters from<CR>  
1911SA003000085P020P020the internal Symbol Set,<CR>  
1911SA002400085P020P020font code SA0<CR>  
1911SA001500050P020P020<ca><e1><eb><f9><f3><ef><f1><df><f3><e1><f4><e5><20><d3><f5><ed>  
<dd><e4><f1><e9><ef><20><CR>  
1911SA001100100P020P020<f4><f9><e3><20><c5><f4><e1><df><f1><f9><e3><20><f4><e7><f2><CR>  
1911SA000700140P020P020Datamax<CR>  
1X1100000100020B365190005005<CR>  
Q0002<CR>  
E<CR>  
Note: The notation “<xx>“ in this DPL file should be interpreted by the reader as representing the  
hexadecimal value of the character sent to the printer.  
E-Class DPL Programmer’s Manual  
147  
Appendix O  
ILPC-KANJI Option  
The Kanji Option is a double-byte scalable font supporting Kanji Gothic B and Gothic E. In the double-  
byte format the printer recalls one character printed from every two 8 bit bytes sent from the host.  
Double-byte scalable fonts are selected using a print format record (see Generating Label Formats and  
Appendix H for details).  
Scalable Double-Byte Font Map - KANJI  
eee  
(Font Code)  
U40  
Scalable  
Font Type  
Scalable Resident  
Binary  
Addressing Addressing  
Hex ASCII  
Code  
Pages  
Font Name  
HG-Gothic-B Kanji Scalable  
EUC, JIS,  
SJIS, UC  
EUC, JIS,  
SJIS, UC  
EUC, JIS,  
SJIS  
u40  
Scalable Resident  
Scalable Resident  
Scalable Resident  
HG-Gothic-B Kanji Scalable  
HG-Gothic-E Kanji Scalable  
HG-Gothic-E Kanji Scalable  
UK1  
uK1  
EUC, JIS,  
SJIS  
u50 - u5z  
u90 - u9z  
Scalable Non-Resident User defined  
(download)  
U50 - U5z... Scalable Non-Resident User defined  
U90 - U9z (download)  
Note: Not all fonts contain an entire compliment of character codes for a given character map.  
148  
E-Class DPL Programmer’s Manual  
Appendix O  
Sample Kanji Gothic B DPL file (binary addressing) and the resulting label:  
<02>L<CR>  
D11<CR>  
ySPM<CR>  
1911S0003100010P020P015Scalable Kanji Gothic B Available<CR>  
1B110000020017001234567890<CR>  
yUJS<CR>  
1X1100001900010b0392011000020002<CR>  
112200002800030JIS CHARACTER’S IN ALL 4 ROTATION’S<CR>  
112200002600030Rotation 1<CR>  
1911U4002650150P012P012<4D><3F><21><21><21><21><4D><4F><21><21><21><21><4D><5F><21>  
<21><21><21><4D><6F><00><00><CR>  
112200002400030Rotation 2<CR>  
2911U4002600150P012P012<4D><3F><00><00><CR>  
2911U4002600205P012P012<4D><4F><00><00><CR>  
2911U4002600250P012P012<4D><5F><00><00><CR>  
2911U4002600300P012P012<4D><6F><00><00><CR>  
112200002200030Rotation 3<CR>  
3911U4002330315P012P012<4D><6F><21><21><21><21><4D><5F><21><21><21><21><4D><4F><21>  
<21><21><21><4D><3F><00><00><CR>  
112200002000030Rotation 4<CR>  
4911U4001950165P012P012<4D><3F><00><00><CR>  
4911U4001950215P012P012<4D><4F><00><00><CR>  
4911U4001950265P012P012<4D><5F><00><00><CR>  
4911U4001950315P012P012<4D><6F><00><00><CR>  
1X1100001100010b0392007500020002<CR>  
112200001650030SCALING JIS CHARACTER’S<CR>  
1911U4001200020P010P020<21><6F><00><00><CR>  
1911U4001200050P020P020<21><6F><00><00><CR>  
1911U4001200080P030P020<21><6F><00><00><CR>  
1911U4001200110P040P020<21><6F><00><00><CR>  
1911U4001200145P040P030<21><6F><00><00><CR>  
1911U4001200190P040P040<21><6F><00><00><CR>  
1911U4001200250P040P050<21><6F><00><00><CR>  
1911U4001200320P040P060<21><6F><00><00><CR>  
112200000050010NORMAL  
112200000050245 NORMAL  
INVERSE<CR>  
MIRROR<CR>  
1911U4000250010P040P040<21><6F><00><00><CR>  
1911U4000250245P040P040<4B><30><00><00><CR>  
A5<CR>  
1911U4000250090P040P040<21><6F><00><00><CR>  
A1<CR>  
M<CR>  
1911U4000250390P040P040<4B><30><00><00><CR>  
M<CR>  
E<CR>  
Note: The notation “<xx>“ in this DPL file should be interpreted by the reader as representing the  
hexadecimal value of the byte sent to the printer.  
E-Class DPL Programmer’s Manual  
149  
Appendix O  
Sample Kanji Gothic E DPL file (Hex-ASCII addressing) and resulting label:  
<02>L<CR>  
D11<CR>  
ySPM<CR>  
1911S0003100010P020P015Scalable Kanji Gothic E Available<CR>  
1B110000020017001234567890<CR>  
yUJS<CR>  
1X1100001900010b0392011000020002<CR>  
112200002800030JIS CHARACTER’S IN ALL 4 ROTATION’S<CR>  
112200002600030Rotation 1<CR>  
1911uK102650150P012P0124D3F212121214D4F212121214D5F212121214D6F<CR>  
112200002400030Rotation 2<CR>  
2911uK102600150P012P0124D3F<CR>  
2911uK102600205P012P0124D4F<CR>  
2911uK102600250P012P0124D5F<CR>  
2911uK102600300P012P0124D6F<CR>  
112200002200030Rotation 3<CR>  
3911uK102330315P012P0124D6F212121214D5F212121214D4F212121214D3F<CR>  
112200002000030Rotation 4<CR>  
4911uK101950165P012P0124D3F<CR>  
4911uK101950215P012P0124D4F<CR>  
4911uK101950265P012P0124D5F<CR>  
4911uK101950315P012P0124D6F<CR>  
1X1100001100010b0392007500020002<CR>  
112200001650030SCALING JIS CHARACTER’S<CR>  
1911uK101200020P010P020216F<CR>  
1911uK101200050P020P020216F<CR>  
1911uK101200080P030P020216F<CR>  
1911uK101200110P040P020216F<CR>  
1911uK101200145P040P030216F<CR>  
1911uK101200190P040P040216F<CR>  
1911uK101200250P040P050216F<CR>  
1911uK101200320P040P060216F<CR>  
112200000050010NORMAL  
112200000050245 NORMAL  
INVERSE<CR>  
MIRROR<CR>  
1911uK100250010P040P040216F<CR>  
1911uK100250245P040P0404B30<CR>  
A5<CR>  
1911uK100250090P040P040216F<CR>  
A1<CR>  
M<CR>  
1911uK100250390P040P0404B30<CR>  
M<CR>  
E<CR>  
150  
E-Class DPL Programmer’s Manual  
Appendix O  
ILPC-CHINESE Option  
The Chinese option is a double-byte scalable font supporting Simplified GB Chinese. In the double-byte  
format, the printer recalls one character printed from every two 8-bit bytes sent from the host. Double-  
byte scalable fonts are selected using a print format record (see Generating Label Formats and Appendix  
H for details).  
DPL Big 5 Encoding Support: The printer firmware supports font files that are encoded for the GB  
Character Map and the Big 5 Character Map. The resident Asian font in the printer is encoded in the GB  
Character Map. To utilize the Big 5 Character Map, the user must download a font file that is Big 5  
encoded. The font file downloaded must be of a size compatible with the module size available. Printing  
characters from the Big 5 encoded font file is accomplished by:  
1. Setting the character mapping with a System Command or Label Format Command (<STX>yUB5 or  
yUB5, respectively).  
2. Setting the ‘b’ field = ‘9’ and ‘eee’ field = ‘Unn’, where ‘nn’ is equal to the Font ID number selected  
for the Big 5 encoded font file downloaded.  
3. Selecting string data corresponding to the Big 5 Character Map.  
Scalable Double-Byte Font Map - CHINESE  
eee  
(Font Code)  
UC0  
Scalable  
Font Type  
Scalable Resident  
Font  
Name  
Simplified GB Chinese  
Binary  
Hex ASCII Code  
Addressing Addressing Pages  
GB  
GB  
B5  
B5  
uc0  
Scalable Resident  
Simplified GB Chinese  
U50 - U5z... Scalable Non-Resident (Download) Big 5  
U90 - U9z  
u50 - u5z  
u90 - u9z  
U50 - U5z... Scalable Non-Resident (Download) User defined  
U90 - U9z  
u50 - u5z  
u90 - u9z  
Scalable Non-Resident (Download) Big 5  
Scalable Non-Resident (Download) User defined  
Sample Simplified GB Chinese DPL file (binary addressing) and resulting label:  
<02>L<CR>  
D11<CR>  
ySPM<CR>  
1911S0003100010P020P015Scalable Chinese Available in GB Character Set<CR>  
1B110000020017001234567890<CR>  
yUGB<CR>  
1X1100001900010b0392011000020002<CR>  
112200002800030GB CHARACTER’S IN ALL 4 ROTATION’S<CR>  
112200002600030Rotation 1<CR>  
1911UC002650150P012P012<BD><D0>A1><A1><A1><A1><BD><D1><A1><A1><A1><A1><BD><D2><A1><A1>  
<A1><A1><BD><D3><00><00><CR>  
112200002400030Rotation 2<CR>  
2911UC002600150P012P012<BD><D0><00><00><CR>  
2911UC002600205P012P012<BD><D1><00><00><CR>  
E-Class DPL Programmer’s Manual  
151  
Appendix O  
2911UC002600250P012P012<BD><D2><00><00><CR>  
2911UC002600300P012P012<BD><D3><00><00><CR>  
112200002200030Rotation 3<CR>  
3911UC002330315P012P012<BD><D3><A1><A1><A1><A1><BD><D2><A1><A1><A1><A1><BD><D1><A1>  
<A1><A1><A1><BD><D0><00><00><CR>  
112200002000030Rotation 4<CR>  
4911UC001950165P012P012<BD><D0><00><00><CR>  
4911UC001950215P012P012<BD><D1><00><00><CR>  
4911UC001950265P012P012<BD><D2><00><00><CR>  
4911UC001950315P012P012<BD><D3><00><00><CR>  
1X1100001100010b0392007500020002<CR>  
112200001650030SCALING GB CHARACTER’S<CR>  
1911UC001200020P010P020<BA><D0><00><00><CR>  
1911UC001200050P020P020<BA><D0><00><00><CR>  
1911UC001200080P030P020<BA><D0><00><00><CR>  
1911UC001200110P040P020<BA><D0><00><00><CR>  
1911UC001200145P040P030<BA><D0><00><00><CR>  
1911UC001200190P040P040<BA><D0><00><00><CR>  
1911UC001200250P040P050<BA><D0><00><00><CR>  
1911UC001200320P040P060<BA><D0><00><00><CR>  
112200000050010NORMAL  
112200000050245 NORMAL  
INVERSE<CR>  
MIRROR<CR>  
1911UC000250010P040P040<BD><E0><00><00><CR>  
1911UC000250245P040P040<BD><E1><00><00><CR>  
A5<CR>  
1911UC000250090P040P040<BD><E0><00><00><CR>  
A1<CR>  
M<CR>  
1911UC000250390P040P040<BD><E1><00><00><CR>  
M<CR>  
E<CR>  
Note: The notation “<xx>“ in this DPL file should be interpreted by the reader as representing the  
hexadecimal value of the byte sent to the printer.  
152  
E-Class DPL Programmer’s Manual  
Appendix P  
Downloading Firmware  
The printer stores its Boot Loader, Operating Program, and Font in Flash memory on the main PCB. This  
configuration allows updates (bug fixes and/or new features) to this firmware. Depending upon the  
printer’s firmware revision level, one of the following procedures can be used to update the firmware.  
Note: Printers with older versions of the Boot Loader must first have the new version 83-2279-04A  
installed. See the Install_Instructions.txt file associated with the package or the Boot Loader file.  
This version of the firmware requires the compatible version of the Boot Loader, Program and  
Fonts:  
Boot Loader firmware 83-2279-04A (filename A3227904_4.01_boot.dlf) or later, font  
firmware 83-2281-04B (filename B3228104_4.02_fonts.dlf) or font firmware 83-2332-04B  
(filename B3233204_4.02_font_with_user_flash_module.dlf) or later.  
Installing printer system firmware version 4.06 P/N 83-2325-04F (filename  
F3232504_4.06_program.dlf) will result in a default power-up configuration. Any user, special  
Setup Menu values will be destroyed. Prior to installing this firmware print the Setup Menu list  
(See the Operator's Manual) to provide a record of the current configuration. After installing the  
new firmware, enter the Setup Mode to re-configure the printer as desired. If a DPL  
configuration file is available, then that same file may be used to re-configure the printer.  
Updating instructions for printers with a current firmware version of 4.05 and below:  
1. Identify the desired firmware revision from the Datamax FTP site at ftp://ftp.datamaxcorp.com and  
download the desired version on to your computer’s hard drive or a floppy disk.  
2. With the printer’s power turned ‘off’, simultaneously press and hold the PAUSE and CANCEL  
Buttons then power ‘on’ the printer. (All front panel indicators should be ‘on’ now; this is download  
mode.) Release the buttons.  
3. The printer is now ready to accept the new firmware data. Using the DOS copy command enter to  
download:  
copy filename.dlf lpt1/b  
Note: Other programs (such as hyper-terminal and certain Windows programs) may also be  
used to download this file.  
Once the download begins the Paused and Fault Indicators will turn ‘off’. The printer will write to  
Flash memory and the checksum and other data are validated. After a successful download is  
complete, the printer will illuminate the Paused Indicator.  
4. Toggle printer power.  
5. Print a Configuration Label (<STX>Z) to verify the new firmware version.  
If the download was unsuccessful, the ‘Fault’ Indicator will illuminate. In this case, try sending the  
file again. If the download continues to fail, the following are possible causes:  
E-Class DPL Programmer’s Manual  
153  
Appendix P  
An invalid or corrupted file is being downloaded. Make sure the file you are attempting to  
download is correct and applicable for your printer model.  
Possible communications errors are occurring. Check the cable connections between the host  
computer and the printer. Be sure to use a quality-shielded cable.  
The printer could not successfully write to or erase the Flash memory; it may be defective. Try  
again and if problem persists call for service  
Updating instructions for printers with a current firmware version of 4.05 and above:  
1. Identify the desired firmware revision from the Datamax FTP site at ftp://ftp.datamaxcorp.com and  
download the desired version on to your computer’s hard drive or a floppy disk.  
2. With the printer’s power turned ‘on’, the printer is now ready to accept the new firmware data. Using  
the DOS copy command enter:  
copy filename.dlf lpt1/b  
Note: Other programs (such as hyper-terminal and certain Windows Driver programs) may also  
be used to download this file.  
The Paused Indicator blinks during the download. After a successful download, the printer will  
illuminate the Paused Indicator steady. The printer will write to Flash memory after all data is  
received, and the checksum and other data are validated. Then a ‘cold reset’ will occur. (When  
connected through the serial port, the printer will also transmit an ‘R’ when complete.) Print a  
Configuration Label (<STX>Z) to verify the new firmware version.  
Conversely, if the download was unsuccessful, the ‘Fault’ Indicator will illuminate and the printer  
will ‘warm reset’. (When connected through the serial port, the printer will also transmit a ‘T’ when  
complete.) The previous firmware programming will not be affected, unless substantial firmware data  
structure changes have occurred. If the printer fails to warm reset, it may be necessary to toggle  
power ‘off’ and ‘on’, or simultaneously press and release PAUSE and CANCEL Buttons.  
Note: The printer will wait forever for the specified number of bytes to be transmitted by the  
host. If a communications error occurs and the host transmission is complete. The host  
may transmit fill data or an <SOH># to ‘warm reset’ the printer.  
If the download fails, try re-sending the file. If it continues to fail, the following are possible causes:  
An invalid or corrupted file is being downloaded. Make sure the file you are attempting to  
download is correct and applicable for your printer model.  
Possible communications errors are occurring. Check the cable connections between the host  
computer and the printer. Be sure to use a quality-shielded cable.  
The printer could not successfully write to or erase the Flash memory; it may be defective. Try  
again and if problem persists, call for service.  
154  
E-Class DPL Programmer’s Manual  
Appendix Q  
E-CLASS 4203 / 4304 Statement of Compatibility  
The E4203, E4204, and E4304, printers have been designed to be compatible with the Ovation2 printer.  
The firmware source code is shared with the Ovation2 and the DMX XL. All DPL parsing and font / bar  
code / graphical imaging will perform the same. The obvious difference is the maximum print speeds.  
Slight differences in the print heat tables may also be noticed.  
Printer Setup – The E Class operator interface is different from the Ovation2 or the DMX XL. Default  
(power-up) parameters may be set that are not available on the Ovation2. These include printer speeds,  
start of print adjust, continuous label length, and others (refer to the Operator’s Manual for the entire  
list). Also, refer to the Operator’s Manual for thermal transfer / direct print setup.  
The E Class supports the Scalable Font Engine, which the Ovation2 does not. There are no scalable fonts  
installed in the standard E Class configuration, but the printer will accept and print TrueType fonts like  
the DMX XL.  
E-Class DPL Programmer’s Manual  
155  
Appendix Q  
156  
E-Class DPL Programmer’s Manual  
Appendix R  
Bar Code Symbology Information Sources  
AIM International, Inc.  
11860 Sunrise Valley Drive, Suite 101  
Reston, VA 22091 USA  
Tel: 703-391-7621  
Fax: 703-391-7624  
AIM JAPAN  
Aios Gotanda Bldg. 6F  
1-10-7 Higashigotanda  
Shinagawa-ku Tokyo 141 Japan  
Tel: 03-3440-9085  
Fax: 03-3440-9086  
AIM EUROPE  
The Old Vicarage  
Haley Hill, Halifax HX3 6DR  
West Yorkshire, England  
Tel: 44-1422-359161  
Fax: 44-1422-3556904  
AIM UK  
The Old Vicarage  
Haley Hill, Halifax HX3 6DR  
United Kingdom  
Tel: 44-1422-359161  
Fax: 44-1422-355604  
AIM USA  
634 Alpha Drive  
Pittsburgh, PA 15238-2802 USA  
Tel: 412-963-8588  
Fax: 412-963-8753  
American National Standards Institute (ANSI)  
11 West 42nd Street  
New York, New York 10036 USA  
Tel: 212-642-4900  
Fax: 212-398-0023  
E-Class DPL Programmer’s Manual  
157  
Appendix R  
Automotive Industry Action Group  
26200 Lahser Road  
Suite 200  
Southfield, MI 48034 USA  
Tel: 313-358-3570  
Fax: 313-358-3253  
Computing Technology Industry Association  
450 E. 22 Street Suite 230  
Lombard, IL 60148-6158 USA  
Tel: 630 268-1818  
Fax: 630 278-1384  
Health Industry Business Communications Council  
PO Box 53528  
Phoenix, AZ 85018 USA  
Tel 602-318-1091  
International Article Numbering Association  
(EAN)  
Rue Royal 29  
B-1000 Brussels  
Belgium  
Tel: 32-22-187674  
Fax: 32-22-187585  
Uniform Code Council, Inc. (UCC)  
8163 Old Yankee Rd. Suite J  
Dayton, OH 45458 USA  
Tel: 513-435-3870  
Fax: 513-435-4749  
U.S. Government Printing Office  
732 North Capitol Street NW  
Washington, DC 20401 USA  
Tel: 202-512-1991  
Fax: 202-512-1293  
158  
E-Class DPL Programmer’s Manual  
Glossary  
alphanumeric Consisting of alphabetic, numeric, punctuation and other symbols.  
backing material The silicon-coated paper carrier material to which labels with adhesive backing are  
affixed. Also referred to as “liner”.  
bar code A representation of alphanumeric information in a pattern of machine-readable marks. The  
basic categories are divided into one-dimensional (UPC, Code 39, Postnet, etc.) and two-  
dimensional barcodes (Data Matrix, MaxiCode, PDF417, etc.).  
boot loader The resident program that loads the application from Flash memory, decompresses it into  
the DRAM, and starts operations.  
burn line The row of thermal elements in the printhead that create the images on the media.  
calibration The process through which Media Sensor readings are entered into the printer for correct  
sensor function (for example, detection of a given media type) and top of form positioning.  
character set The entire complement of alphanumeric symbols contained in a given font.  
checksum An alphanumeric error detection method used in many bar code symbologies for  
informational security.  
continuous media An uninterrupted roll or box of label or tag stock media that contains no gap, slit,  
notch, or black mark to separate individual labels or tags.  
cutter A mechanical device with a rotary or guillotine type blade used to cut labels or tags following  
printing.  
defaults The functional setting values returned following a factory reset of the printer.  
diagnostics Programs used to locate and diagnose hardware problems.  
die-cut media Media that has been cut into a pattern using a press, where the excess paper is removed  
leaving individual labels, with gaps between them, attached to a backing material.  
direct thermal The printing method that uses a heat sensitive media and only the heat of the thermal  
printhead to create an image on the label.  
direct thermal media Media coated with special chemicals that react and darken with the application  
of heat.  
DPI (dots per inch) A measurement of print resolution, rated in the number of thermal elements  
contained in one inch of the printhead. Also referred to as “resolution.”  
E-Class DPL Programmer’s Manual  
159  
Glossary  
DPL (Datamax Programming Language) programming commands used specifically for control of  
and label production in Datamax printers.  
fan-fold Media that is folded and stacked.  
feed speed The rate at which the media moves under the printhead in non-printed areas and between  
labels.  
Flash memory Non-volatile memory (does not require printer power to maintain data) that can be  
erased and reprogrammed, used to hold the printer’s operating program.  
font A set of alphanumeric characters that share a particular typeface.  
gap A space between die-cut or notched labels used to sense the top-of-form.  
IPS (inches per second) Imperial measurement of printer speeds.  
label A paper or synthetic printing material, typically with a pressure sensitive adhesive backing.  
label length The distance from the top of the label to the bottom of the label as it exits the printer.  
label repeat The distance from the top of one label to the top of the next label.  
label tracking Excessive lateral (side to side) movement of the media as it travels under the printhead.  
label width The left to right measurement of the label as it exits the printer.  
media Generalized term for all types of printing stocks, including: roll fed, continuous, butt-cut, die-  
cut, reflective, and fanfold.  
media hub Device in the printer used to support roll media.  
media sensor An electronic device equipped with photosensors to detect media and the top-of-form on  
die-cut, notched or reflective media.  
MMPS (millimeters per second) Metric measurement of printer speeds.  
notched stock Media, typically tag stock, with holes or notches in the material that is used to signal the  
top-of-form. The printer must be set to ‘gap’ to use this media type.  
perforation Small cuts extending through the backing and/or label material to facilitate their  
separation. Also referred to as “perf”.  
preprinted media Label stock that contains borders, text, or graphics, floodcoating, etc.  
present sensor An electronic sensor that provides a signal to the printer firmware that a label is  
present, typically mounted beyond the printhead, where the labels exit the printer.  
print speed The rate at which the media moves under the printhead during the printing process.  
160  
E-Class DPL Programmer’s Manual  
Glossary  
reflective media Media imprinted with carbon-based black marks on the underside of the material,  
which is used to signal the top-of-form when the ‘reflective’ Media Sensor is enabled.  
registration Repeatable top to bottom alignment of printed labels.  
reverse speed The backward rate of media motion into the printer during tear-off, peel and present and  
cutting operations for positioning the label at the start of print position.  
ribbon An extruded polyester tape with several layers of material, one of which is ink-like, used to  
produce an image on the label. Also referred to as “foil”.  
roll media A form of media that is wound upon a cardboard core.  
start of print The position on the label where the printing actually begins.  
tag stock A heavy paper or synthetic printing material, typically featuring a notch or black mark for top  
of form and no adhesive backing.  
thermal transfer The printing method that creates an image by transferring ink from a ribbon onto the  
media using the heat from the thermal printhead.  
TOF (top-of-form) The start of a new label as indicated by a label gap, notch, mark or programming.  
E-Class DPL Programmer’s Manual  
161  
Glossary  
162  
E-Class DPL Programmer’s Manual  
Index  
A
C
alphanumeric · 52, 53,  
alternate line terminator · 5, 35, 50, 142  
ASCII characters · 2, 34, 37, 61, 64, 65, 116, 118  
HEX ASCII addressing · 148, 150, 151  
text file · 74  
C program · 2, 74  
calibration · 4, 159  
cancel button · 4, 8  
attention getter · 5  
character set (Also see Symbol Sets)  
double-byte · 16, 26, 51, 131, 132, 135, 148, 150, 151  
encoding · 27, 34, 35, 141  
maps · 133 - 135  
single-byte · 2, 16, 26, 51, 131 - 136, 147, 149  
B
backfeed · 14, 27, 28, 141, 142  
speed · 47, 139, 142  
backing material · 159  
bar code · 65, 155, 159  
Aztec · 101, 102, 122 - 124  
Codabar · 101, 102, 107  
Code 128 · 101, 102, 104, 105, 110, 111, 124  
Code 3 of 9 · 101 - 103  
Code 93 · 101, 102, 109  
DataMatrix · 101, 102, 116, 117  
defaults · 102  
EAN-13 · 101, 102, 106, 145  
EAN-8 · 101, 102, 106  
checksum · 101, 159  
Chinese fonts· 130, 133, 147, 151  
circles · 62, 66, 68, 69  
code page (Also see Symbol Sets) · 94, 96, 133 - 135, 147,  
148  
column  
position · 61, 63  
values · 137  
Commands  
<SOH># · 7, 9, 139, 154  
<SOH>A · 7, 9, 142  
<SOH>B · 8, 18, 142  
FIM · 101, 102, 114  
<SOH>C · 8, 142  
Health Industry Bar Code · 101, 102, 107  
height field· 61, 62, 65, 66, 87  
Interleaved 2 of 5 · 101, 102, 104, 107, 108  
MicroPDF417 · 101, 102, 127 - 129  
PDF417 · 101, 102, 115  
<SOH>D · 8, 15, 57, 142  
<SOH>E · 8, 9, 142  
<SOH>F · 7, 9, 142  
<SOH>U · 9, 29, 142  
<STX>a · 12, 141  
<STX>AwmmddyyyyhhMMjjj · 11, 142  
<STX>B · 12, 141  
<STX>cnnnn · 13, 14, 30, 142  
<STX>d · 13, 142  
Plessey · 101, 102, 108  
Postnet · 101, 102, 110, 114  
QR Code · 101, 102, 118 - 122  
Telepen · 101, 102, 112  
UCC/EAN Code 128 · 101, 110  
UCC/EAN Code 128 Random Weight · 101, 111  
UCC/EAN Code128 K-MART NON EDI · 101, 111  
UPC-A · 101 - 103, 143  
UPC addendums, 101, 109  
UPC-E · 101, 102, 104  
UPS MaxiCode · 101, 102, 112 - 114  
Basic program · 73  
batch printing · 8, 9, 12, 14, 18, 39, 52 - 53, 140  
baud rate · 32, 34  
binary addressing · 148, 149, 151  
binary control codes · 50, 5  
bitmapped fonts · (See Fonts)  
boot loader · 153, 159  
boxes · 66, 67  
brackets · 2  
<STX>e · 14, 30, 141  
<STX>Ennnn · 13, 14, 21, 52, 53, 142  
<STX>fnnn · 14, 18, 32, 36, 142  
<STX>F · 14, 141  
<STX>G · 13, 14, 52, 53, 141  
<STX>Iabfnn…n<CR>data · 15, 66, 141, 143  
<STX>imtnnName<CR>xx…xdata · 16, 141  
<STX>J · 16, 142  
<STX>k · 16, 142  
<STX>Kbnnn · 28, 141  
<STX>KC · 29, 137, 141  
<STX>KDwxyz · 5, 20, 25, 30, 32 - 35  
<STX>KEex · 34, 35, 141  
<STX>Kfnnnn · 32, 36, 142  
<STX>KQ · 28, 36, 141  
<STX>Kr · 37, 141  
<STX>KR · 37, 141  
<STX>L · 17, 39, 141  
<STX>m · 17, 142  
butt-cut media · 19, 160  
buttons  
cancel · 4, 8  
feed · 4, 18 - 20, 31  
<STX>Mnnnn · 17, 142  
<STX>n · 17, 142  
pause · 4, 8, 16  
<STX>o · 18, 141  
E-Class DPL Programmer’s Manual  
163  
Index  
<STX>Onnnn · 14, 18, 19, 32, 33, 36, 142  
<STX>p · 18, 141  
E
<STX>P · 18, 141  
<STX>Q · 19, 141  
<STX>qa · 19, 141  
<STX>r · 19, 30, 142  
edge sensor · 13, 14, 19, 26, 29, 30, 34, 141  
embedding (Also see Control Code) · 52, 53, 56,  
error codes · 89  
extended system commands · 27  
<STX>s · 13, 20, 142  
<STX>S · 54, 55, 141  
<STX>Sn · 13, 19, 142  
<STX>t · 20, 142  
<STX>T · 20, 141  
F
<STX>Tstring · 11, 54 - 56, 141  
<STX>U[T]nnss…s · 21, 22, 50, 141  
<STX>v · 22, 141  
F buttons · 4  
fan-fold media · 19, 160  
feed button · 4, 18 - 20, 31  
<STX>Vn · 22, 30, 142  
<STX>wa · 24, 142  
feed speed · 19, 49, 142, 160  
feedback · 12, 139  
<STX>Wa · 19, 23, 48, 141  
<STX>xmtnn…n · 25, 26, 141  
<STX>Xa · 24, 26, 49, 57, 135, 142  
<STX>Y · 25, 141  
field  
decrementing · 13, 20, 53, 54, 141  
incrementing · 13, 20, 52 - 54, 141  
limits · 137  
<STX>ySxx · 26, 51, 91, 133 - 136, 141, 151  
<STX>zm · 25, 26, 141  
<STX>Z · 26, 141  
communications · 7, 9, 12, 26, 32 - 34  
compatibility · 13, 32, 155  
configuration  
replacements · 13, 21, 50, 51, 141  
firmware · 1, 22, 37, 141, 147, 151, 153 - 155  
Flash memory · 9, 19, 24, 27, 29, 33, 57, 64, 137, 142, 153,  
154, 159, 160  
fonts · 50, 51, 72, 91, 159, 160  
downloaded bit-mapped · 23 - 25, 58, 63, 64, 131, 132  
Chinese · 132, 135, 147, 151  
label · 4, 11, 26, 29, 137, 141  
query · 30  
IntelliFont · 16, 64, 133, 134  
set · 29  
internal bit-mapped and smooth· 52, 60 - 64, 84 - 87, 132  
Kanji · 64, 101, 131, 132, 135, 147 - 150  
Korean · 132, 135  
continuous media · 13, 30, 31, 33, 34, 142, 159  
control code  
scalable · 16, 25 - 28, 37, 43, 51 - 53, 60 - 65, 83, 131 -  
134, 141, 147, 148, 151, 155  
TrueType · 16, 43, 64, 133 - 135, 155  
font attributes · 43  
alternates · 5, 30, 34, 35, 54  
embedding · 34, 35, 50  
standard · 5, 30, 33, 34  
conventions · 2  
font downloading · 8, 16, 24, 57, 58, 131, 141, 153  
font ID · 16, 23, 57, 61, 62, 83, 131, 141, 151  
font loading commands · 57, 58  
font mapping (Also see Symbol Sets) · 131, 148, 151  
format record header · 21, 61, 83 - 85, 87, 101, 131  
formatting attributes · 40  
cutter · 18, 22, 30, 32 - 34, 39, 41, 141, 159  
D
data bits · 32  
front panel · 4, 8, 89, 153  
data field · 63, 65, 66, 101  
datamax programming language · 1, 2, 160  
decrementing fields· 13, 20, 53, 54, 141  
default · 159  
bar code dimensions · 102  
factory · 4, 7, 11, 29, 39  
G
gap · 14, 30, 33, 34, 159, 160, 161  
global register · 44, 55, 152  
module · 24, 137  
graphics · 60, 61, 63, 66, 160  
speeds · 139  
delimiters · 34, 35  
diagnostics · 159  
die-cut media · 14, 31, 32, 159, 160  
direct thermal · 31, 159  
H
direct thermal media · 31, 159  
double buffer mode · 13, 142  
dot pattern label· 4, 20, 26, 141  
dots per inch · 63, 65, 137, 159  
DRAM · 7, 19, 20, 27, 36, 37, 57, 64, 137, 142  
heat value · 45, 141, 155, 159, 161  
height multiplier · 42, 61, 62, 64, 66  
hex dump mode · 18, 20, 26  
horizontal adjustment (Also see Column Position) · 41  
164  
E-Class DPL Programmer’s Manual  
Index  
media · 14, 19, 34, 59, 159 - 161  
butt-cut · 19, 160  
I
continuous · 13, 30, 31, 33, 34, 142, 159  
die-cut · 14, 31, 32, 159, 160  
direct thermal · 31, 159  
fan-fold · 19, 160  
notched · 14, 31, 160  
reflective · 13, 19, 30, 31, 33, 34, 142, 160, 161  
roll · 19, 159 - 161  
sensor · 13, 14, 18, 19, 25, 30, 31, 33, 34, 159, 160  
tag · 19, 159, 160, 161  
thermal transfer · 31, 34, 155, 161  
memory configuration · 27 - 30, 36  
memory module · 15, 16, 19, 20, 23 - 30, 37, 48, 49, 62,  
64, 66, 137, 141, 142  
image downloading · 8, 15, 137, 141, 142, 144  
images · 25, 40, 60 - 63, 66  
immediate commands · 5, 7, 8, 11, 17, 42  
imperial (inches) mode · 13, 17, 18, 28, 37, 46, 142, 160  
incrementing fields · 13, 20, 52 - 54, 141  
IntelliFont · 16, 64, 133, 135  
interface cable · 3, 4  
internal module · 27, 28, 137, 151  
internal test label · 4  
IPS · 46, 47, 139, 160  
J
mirrored fields · 45  
MMPS · 139, 160  
module identifiers · 137  
Japanese · 133  
Julian date · 11, 12, 55  
N
K
no paper min · 30, 31  
notched stock · 14, 31, 160  
Kanji · 64, 101, 118 - 121, 131, 132, 135, 147 - 150  
Korean · 132, 135  
O
L
operating program · 149, 160  
options · 19, 22, 33, 34  
label · 12 - 14, 16 - 19, 21, 28, 30, 31, 33, 39, 41, 42, 47,  
48, 60 - 63, 137, 141, 142, 159 - 161  
alignment · 30, 31  
alignment length · 30, 31  
database configuration · 4, 11, 26, 29, 137, 141  
dot pattern · 4, 20, 26, 141  
P
paper fault · 4, 7, 9, 17  
parameters · 2  
parity · 33, 34  
pause · 4, 7 - 9, 16, 18, 141, 142  
pause button · 4, 8, 16  
paused indicator · 4, 8  
perforation · 160  
point size · 63, 83, 84  
polygons · 66 - 68  
power connection · 3, 26, 29, 139  
preprinted data · 13, 41, 48, 160  
present  
adjust · 29, 30, 32  
sensor · 16, 22, 30 - 32, 34, 158  
speed · 44, 142  
print  
buffer · 8, 13, 37  
method · 30, 34  
position · 18, 32, 41, 48, 59 - 61, 63 - 67 142  
resolution · 28, 62, 65, 83, 137  
speed · 46, 139, 142, 160  
printable width · 27 - 29, 37, 137  
printhead · 14, 20, 31, 42, 45, 62, 63, 141, 159 - 161  
formatting · 8, 13, 14, 21, 25, 39, 43, 44, 48 - 51, 54, 59,  
60, 89, 131, 137, 141  
home position · 59, 63  
length · 17, 28, 30, 31, 142, 160  
preprinting · 41, 48, 160  
printable width · 27 - 29, 37, 137  
quantity · 9, 13, 14, 47, 142  
sequencing · 52 -54  
size · 13, 26, 29, 36  
start of print position · 18, 32, 33, 36, 47, 141, 142  
stop location/position · 14, 29, 30, 32, 44, 142  
throughput · 13, 20, 27, 28, 50  
top of form (TOF)· 18, 19, 25, 26, 28 - 31, 33, 37, 159,  
161  
width · 30, 160  
line termination · 2, 5, 35, 50, 60, 64 - 68, 115 - 119, 122,  
127, 142  
lines · 62, 66, 67  
M
measurement  
inch · 13, 17, 18, 28, 37, 46, 142, 160  
metric · 17, 37, 46, 142  
E-Class DPL Programmer’s Manual  
165  
Index  
present · 44, 142  
print · 46, 139, 142, 160  
R
slew · 44, 49, 139, 142  
real time clock · 11, 31, 37  
rectangles · 69  
record structure · 60 - 69  
reflective  
media · 13, 19, 30, 31, 33, 34, 142, 160, 161  
sensor · 13, 19, 25, 30, 31, 33, 34, 142, 160  
registration · 161  
start of print position · 18, 32, 33, 36, 47, 141, 142  
stop location/position · 14, 29, 30, 32, 44, 142  
store label · 49, 142  
symbol sets · 26, 51, 83, 84, 91 - 99, 132 - 135, 141, 142  
system-level command · 5, 7, 11, 27, 60  
replacement fields · 13, 21, 50, 51, 141  
resolution · 28, 42, 62, 63, 65, 83, 84, 102, 137,159  
retrieve label formats · 48  
reverse (backfeed) speed · 47, 139, 142, 161  
ribbon · 7, 9, 25, 161  
T
tag stock · 19, 159, 160, 161  
termination commands · 42, 51  
text presentation · 43  
roll media · 19, 159 - 161  
thermal transfer · 31, 34, 155, 161  
throughput · 13, 20, 27, 28, 50  
top of form (TOF)· 18, 19, 25, 26, 29 - 31, 33, 159, 161  
triangles · 67, 69  
rotation · 40, 59 - 61, 64 - 68  
row position · 48, 61, 63 - 68, 142  
TrueType fonts· 16, 43, 64, 133 - 135, 155  
S
Scalable Font · (See fonts)  
V
sensor values · 25, 30, 31, 33, 141, 159  
serial port configuration · 29, 30, 32  
single buffer mode · 20, 142  
Visual Basic application · 75, 77, 79  
version string · 22  
vertical adjustment (Also see Row Position) · 48  
slew speed · 44, 49, 139, 142  
smooth font · 52, 60 - 64, 84 - 87, 132  
smooth scalable font processor · 28, 37  
SOP adjust (Also see Start of Print Position) · 30, 32  
special label-formatting commands · 11, 44, 54, 55  
speed ranges · 139  
W
speeds  
width multiplier · 42, 61, 62, 64  
word length · 32 - 34  
backfeed (reverse) · 47, 139, 142, 161  
feed · 19, 49, 142, 160  
166  
E-Class DPL Programmer’s Manual  

Briggs Stratton 8FBC User Manual
Carrier High Wall Duct Free Split System 40MVQ User Manual
Central Hydraulics Automobile Accessories 3 ton floor hack User Manual
Friedrich PE07R__B User Manual
General Electric Air Conditioner AGE18 User Manual
Harbor Freight Tools 34313 User Manual
Heat Controller Inc Air Conditioner A MMH36FA 1 User Manual
Heat Controller Inc Air Conditioner CD 101L User Manual
Honda Power Equipment GV 35 User Manual
HP Hewlett Packard HP LaserJet Printer 8000 DN User Manual